JP2020185456A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably enhancing game amusement.SOLUTION: First holding information is acquired on the basis of winning to a first operation port and second holding information is acquired on the basis of winning to a second operation port. When the first holding information is held and stored, the game round is executed in a first special pattern display section, and when second holding information is held and stored, the game round is executed in a second special pattern display section. At this time, when the second holding information which is an execution target of the game round earlier than the second holding information which is an execution target in a special light emission state does not correspond to a big winning result, the second holding information which is an execution target in the special light emission state corresponds to a big winning result or a small winning result. On the other hand, when the second holding information which is an execution target of the game round earlier than the second holding information which is an execution target of a special light emission state corresponds to a big winning result, the second holding information which is an execution target of the special light emission state corresponds to the big winning result.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-261415

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and a special information acquisition means.
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has already been acquired, the predetermined notification control means for executing the predetermined notification and the predetermined notification control means.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. (A), (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the effect for game rotation is executed on the symbol display device in the normal game state. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the effect for game play is executed by the symbol display device in a high probability state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special figure special electric control processing in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 1st hold information in a main MPU, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 2nd hold information in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the variation display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. (A)-(g) In the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration. (A) to (f) It is a time chart for explaining how the low probability jackpot result is invalidated. (A)-(g) In the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the low-accuracy jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration. (A) to (f) It is a time chart for explaining how the low probability jackpot result is invalidated. (A)-(g) In the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for explaining how the high-accuracy jackpot result is not invalidated. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the structure of the 1st special figure holding area, (b) it is explanatory drawing for explaining the structure of the execution area for the 1st special figure, and (c) 2nd special figure. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the holding area, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the execution area for the second special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the front side hold in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the corresponding hold in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition executed by the main MPU in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special ball-entry device in the non-accepted state, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of the first special ball-entry device in the accepted state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning / failing table in (a)-(d) 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting mode of the duration of a game round. (A) to (e) are time charts for explaining how the game progresses in each of the normal game state and the high probability state. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special figure special electric control processing in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 1st hold information in a main MPU, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 2nd hold information in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the variation display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the hold command in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing in the display side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the number-of-times notification executed by the symbol display device, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the launch promotion notification executed by the symbol display device. .. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) the distribution table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in the sound light side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the reading process of the effect lottery table in the sound light side MPU, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st effect lottery table and the 2nd effect lottery table. (A) to (d) There are time charts showing the timing when the special effect is executed. It is a front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) to (d) a winning / failing table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of hold notification in a main MPU. (A) to (h) are time charts showing how the hold notification is executed.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. Note that in FIG. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 66a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is provided with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or launch handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is entered into the first operating port 33 or when the balls are entered into the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. ..

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33. Further, the configuration is limited to a configuration in which both the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 are a plurality. Instead, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 may be one, and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 is one. It may be a certain configuration, or both may have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is one.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, in the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward.

The lower frame portion 36a, which is a lower portion of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, is provided with a stage portion 36b so as to extend laterally above the first operating port 33, and is capable of variable display. The left frame portion 36c, which is the left portion of the symbol display device 41 in the unit 36, is an entrance of a warp passage that enables a game ball flowing down the left region of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36b. Part 36d is formed. The lateral central portion of the stage portion 36b exists vertically above the first operating port 33, and the lead-out portion 36e for leading the game ball below the stage portion 36b by its own weight is present in the central portion. Is formed. In this case, the game ball led out to the stage portion 36b and led out from a region other than the lead-out portion 36e to the lower side of the stage portion 36b is difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the lead-out portion 36e The game ball led out from the lower side of the stage portion 36b enters the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win a prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the second operating port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the general electric power open state, the general electric power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display device are used. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. In addition, as the pattern that is variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the general drawing reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clarified through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b. In the first special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 as a trigger, so that a variable display of the pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, a winning lottery is performed by using a winning prize in the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display of a pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the pattern displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters Can be considered, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed can be considered.

In the special figure unit 37, the first special figure reservation display unit 37c and the second special figure reservation display unit 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. .. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is held up to four, and the held number is displayed by lighting the first special figure hold display unit 37c. Further, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 37d.

Regarding the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the first special symbol display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is displayed accordingly. At the same time, when the second special figure display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. .. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode, which will be described later, which shifts after winning the prize, etc. Is done.

Based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the game is played until a predetermined result is displayed and the display is finished. Corresponds to one time. In the pachinko machine 10, at least a part of the execution period of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least a part of the execution period of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b can overlap. ing. That is, even while the game times are being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b can be started, and the game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b. The game rotation in the first special figure display unit 37a can be started even during the process.

In the pachinko machine 10, the winning / failing determination process is executed based on the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34, and the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the determination result of the winning / failing determination process becomes the winning result. In the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed, and the game ball is paid out when the special electric winning device 32 in the open state is won a prize. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, a predetermined number of round games are executed. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined opening duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a special electric winning device 32. That is. In this case, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In, the opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, since the open duration of the round game is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, the upper limit is set to the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. It can be expected that more than the number of game balls will win. In addition, the maximum number of round games is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

As the winning / failing lottery mode of the winning / failing determination process, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of a winning result in which the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs is relatively high or low. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a is opened per unit time when compared in the situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PA in the same manner. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that is relatively high and low. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. Hereinafter, the gaming state in which the low probability mode is in the low frequency support mode is referred to as a normal gaming state, and the gaming state in which the high probability mode is in the high frequency support mode is referred to as a high probability state.

Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the lower area PA1 which is the area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. Further, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device in a state where the first operating port 33 is arranged upward and the second operating port 34 is arranged downward in the vertical direction. Has been done. Further, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 can be controlled to be in an open state when the through gate 35 is won, but the through gate 35 is in the area to the left of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. It is located in a left region PA2. Then, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA2 is guided to the lower region PA1, and the game ball guided to the lower region PA1 is guided to the region where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided. Can be done. Therefore, when the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the first operating port 33, not only the winning of the first operating port 33 but also the winning of the second operating port 34 can occur. When the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the second operating port 34, not only the winning of the second operating port 34 may occur, but also the winning of the first operating port 33 may occur.

When the game state is the normal game state, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as described above, so that it is difficult for the second operating port 34 to win a prize, and the first operating port is more difficult than the second operating port 34. Winning of 33 is likely to occur. Therefore, in the normal game state, the execution target of the game is basically the first special figure display unit 37a, and when a prize is accidentally generated in the second operating port 34, the second special figure display unit 37b is used. It is the target of the game.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as described above, so that the second operating port 34 is likely to win a prize. In this case, in the high probability state, the second operating port 34 is more likely to win a prize than the first operating port 33. However, as described above, when the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the second operating port 34, the first operating port 33 may be won and the lead unit 36e of the stage portion 36b is guided. Since the game ball will win the first operating port 33 with a high probability, the first operating port 33 will be won with the same frequency as in the normal game state even in the high probability state. Therefore, in the high probability state, both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are to be executed at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, in the high probability state, an event in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are likely to overlap is likely to occur.

The effect for the game round is executed by the symbol display device 41 in a manner corresponding to the patterns of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are the targets of the game round. The display content of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for game rounds is executed will be described.

First, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for game rotation is executed in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 4A and 4B. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are explanatory views for explaining how the effect for game rotation is executed by the symbol display device 41 in the normal game state.

In the normal game state, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 basically displays the normal hold display area 42 and the decoration area 43. The normal hold display area 42 is set along the upper edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and an area other than the normal hold display area 42 is set in the decorative area 43 on the display surface. The decorative area 43 has a larger display area than the normal hold display area 42.

In the normal hold display area 42, an image for notifying the player of the number of hold information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on the winning of the first operating port 33 is displayed. The hold information is information that triggers the execution of the hit / miss determination process in the main control device 71, and is information that triggers the execution of the game round. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the first hold information) acquired by winning the prize in the first operation port 33 triggers the execution of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, and the second operation port 34 wins a prize. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the second hold information) acquired in response to the above triggers the execution of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b. A maximum of 4 pieces of the first hold information are held and stored, and a maximum of 4 pieces of the second hold information are also held and stored. As described above, in the normal gaming state, winning the first operating port 33 is likely to occur, whereas winning the second operating port 34 is unlikely to occur. Therefore, in the decoration area 43, an image for notifying the player of the number of first reserved information is displayed, while an image for notifying the player of the number of second reserved information is not displayed.

Regarding the display contents of the normal hold display area 42 Specifically, a number of hold images G1 corresponding to the number of first hold information is displayed in the normal hold display area 42. That is, if the number of the first hold information stored on hold is 0, the hold image G1 is not displayed in the normal hold display area 42. Further, if the number of first reserved information stored on hold is one, one reserved image G1 is displayed, and if the number of first reserved information stored on hold is two, the reserved image G1 is two. If the number of first reserved information displayed and stored is 3, three reserved images G1 are displayed, and if the number of first reserved information stored on hold is four, the reserved image G1 is displayed. Is displayed. When a plurality of reserved images G1 are displayed, the plurality of reserved images G1 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. Further, when the number of the first reserved information stored on hold increases, the held image G1 is displayed so as to increase toward the right, and the first reserved information is held and stored as a trigger for the start of the game round. When the number of the first reserved information is decreasing, the reserved image G1 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left. In the case of FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b), since the number of first reserved information stored on hold is two, the normal hold display area 42 has two reserved images G1 (black circles). Images) are displayed side by side.

In the decoration area 43, a plurality of (specifically, three) common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed, and the effect character G5 is displayed behind the common symbol images G2 to G4. Regarding the display contents of the common symbol images G2 to G4, in detail, three cubic-shaped base symbol images G6 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and a numerical symbol G7 is displayed in front of each base symbol image G6. Then, the base symbol image G6 rotates in the vertical direction around a rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the center of the base symbol image G6, and the symbol G7 displayed on the front surface of each base symbol image G6 is accompanied by the rotation. Is changed. The symbol G7 is a number from "1" to "9", and in the normal game state, the same symbol G7 is displayed when a winning result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process executed with the first hold information as a trigger. In this state, the rotation display of the common symbol images G2 to G4 is stopped, and if the winning result is not obtained, the same symbol G7 is not displayed. In addition, when the winning result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process and the high-accuracy jackpot result described later is obtained, the same odd-numbered symbols G7 are all displayed, and the low-accuracy jackpot result described later is obtained. Is in a state where the same even-numbered symbols G7 are all displayed. Further, when the reach effect indicating that the expectation of the winning result is high is executed, the same symbol G7 is stopped and displayed in the common symbol image G2 on the left and the common symbol image G4 on the right. The reach variation is performed so that the rotation display of the common symbol image G3 of is continued. If the result of the win / fail judgment process is the winning result, the rotation display of the common symbol image G3 in the center is stopped while the symbol G7 constituting the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed, and the win / fail judgment process is performed. If the result is an out-of-game game, the rotation display of the central common symbol image G3 is stopped in a state where the symbol G7 different from the symbol G7 constituting the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed. In the reach effect, the common symbol images G2 to G4 will continue to be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect character G5 is displayed in a state where the common symbol images G2 to G4 are hidden or reduced. The display effect used may be executed, and in addition to or instead of hiding or reducing the common symbol images G2 to G4, the normal hold display area 42 is hidden to display the symbol display device. The entire display surface of 41 may be the decorative area 43.

In the normal game state, the normal hold display area 42 and the decorative area 43 are displayed on the symbol display device 41 as described above, but a prize is accidentally generated in the second operating port 34 and the second operation port 34 is displayed. When the game round triggered by the hold information is executed, the additional decoration area 44 is set in a part of the decoration area 43, and the variable display of the symbol G7 is executed in the additional decoration area 44. The display area of the additional decorative area 44 is set to be narrower than the display area of the area other than the additional decorative area 44 in the decorative area 43, and is displayed so as not to overlap with the common symbol images G2 to G4 and the effect character G5. Will be done.

A plurality of symbols G8 to G10 are displayed in the additional decoration area 44, and the plurality of symbols G8 to G10 are scrolled and displayed in the vertical direction at the start of the game round. The symbols G8 to G10 displayed in the additional decorative area 44 are displayed by reducing the image data for displaying the symbols G7 of the common symbol images G2 to G4 to a predetermined size and using them. In the normal game state, if the winning result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process executed with the second hold information as a trigger, the scroll display of the symbols G8 to G10 is stopped with the same symbols G8 to G10 displayed. If the winning result is not obtained, the same symbols G8 to G10 will not be displayed when the scroll display is stopped. In addition, when the winning result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process and the high-accuracy jackpot result described later is obtained, the same odd-numbered symbols G8 to G10 are all displayed, resulting in the low-accuracy jackpot result described later. In this case, the same even-numbered symbols G8 to G10 are all displayed. Further, when the reach effect indicating that the expectation of winning result is high is executed, the scroll display of the central symbol G9 is displayed in the situation where the same left symbol G8 and right symbol G10 are stopped and displayed. Reach fluctuations are carried out. If the result of the win / fail judgment process is the winning result, the scroll display of the center symbol G9 is stopped while the symbols G8 to G10 constituting the combination of reach symbols are stopped and displayed, and the win / fail judgment process is performed. If the result is an out-of-game game, the scroll display of the central symbol G9 is stopped while the symbols G8 to G10 different from the symbols G8 to G10 constituting the combination of reach symbols are stopped and displayed.

In the situation where the game round triggered by the second hold information is not executed as described above, these are performed by displaying only the normal hold display area 42 and the decoration area 43 without displaying the additional decoration area 44. It is possible to secure a wide range of the normal hold display area 42 and the decorative area 43. On the other hand, in the situation where the game round triggered by the second hold information is being executed, by displaying the additional decoration area 44, it is only notified that the game round triggered by the second hold information is being executed. Instead, it is possible to emphasize that the game round has been started with the second hold information as an opportunity.

Next, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for game rounds is executed in a high probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b). 5 (a) and 5 (b) are explanatory views for explaining how the effect for game rotation is executed by the symbol display device 41 in a high probability state.

In the high probability state, as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 has a first individual display area 45, a first reserved display area 46, and a second individual display. The area 47, the second reserved display area 48, and the decorative area 43 are displayed. The first individual display area 45, the first reserved display area 46, the second individual display area 47, and the second reserved display area 48 are set along the upper edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The display areas of these display areas 45 to 48 are the same or substantially the same, the first individual display area 45 is set in the left corner portion, and the first reserved display area 46 is set to the right of the first individual display area 45. The second reserved display area 48 is set to the right of the second reserved display area 48, and the second individual display area 47 is set to the right corner portion. Further, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, areas other than these display areas 45 to 48 are set as the decorative area 43. The display area of the decorative area 43 is set wider than that of the display areas 45 to 48, and the display area of the decorative area 43 is set wider than the total display area of the display areas 45 to 48. ing.

In the first individual display area 45, the image is displayed corresponding to the situation where the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed, and in the second individual display area 47, the second hold information is used as a trigger. In the situation where the game times are being executed, the corresponding image display is performed. In detail about the content of the image display, a plurality of symbols G11 to G13 are displayed in the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47, and at the start of the corresponding game round, the plurality of symbols G11 to G11 G13 is scrolled vertically. The same image data is used between the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the first individual display area 45 and the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the second individual display area 47. Further, the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 are displayed by reducing the image data for displaying the symbols G7 of the common symbol images G2 to G4 to a predetermined size and using them.

If a winning result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process executed with the corresponding hold information as a trigger, the scroll display of the symbols G11 to G13 is stopped while all the same symbols G11 to G13 are displayed, and the winning result is obtained. If this is not the case, the same symbols G11 to G13 will not be displayed when the scroll display is stopped. In addition, when the winning result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process and the high-accuracy jackpot result described later is obtained, the same odd-numbered symbols G11 to G13 are all displayed, resulting in the low-accuracy jackpot result described later. In this case, all the same even-numbered symbols G11 to G13 are displayed. In addition, when a reach effect indicating that the expectation of winning result is high is executed, the scroll display of the central symbol G12 is displayed in a situation where the same left symbol G11 and right symbol G13 are stopped and displayed. Reach fluctuations are carried out. If the result of the win / fail judgment process is the winning result, the scroll display of the center symbol G12 is stopped while the symbols G11 to G13 constituting the combination of reach symbols are stopped and displayed, and the win / fail judgment process is performed. If the result is an out-of-game game, the scroll display of the central symbol G12 is stopped while the symbols G11 to G13 different from the symbols G11 to G13 constituting the combination of reach symbols are stopped and displayed.

In the first hold display area 46, an image is displayed to notify the player of the number of first hold information held and stored, and in the second hold display area 48, the number of second hold information held and stored. Is displayed to notify the player. The contents of these image displays are the same as the contents of the image display in the normal hold display area 42. Specifically, in the first hold display area 46, a number of holds corresponding to the number of hold and stored first hold information is held. The image G1 is displayed, and in the second hold display area 48, the number of hold images G1 corresponding to the number of the second hold information stored on hold is displayed.

In the decoration area 43 in the high probability state, the effect character G5 is displayed as in the case of the normal game state. In the high probability state, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed as shown in FIG. 5A until the reach effect is started in either the first individual display area 45 or the second individual display area 47. There is no such thing. On the other hand, in the high probability state, when the reach effect is started in either the first individual display area 45 or the second individual display area 47, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed as shown in FIG. 5 (b). Is started. In this case, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the display modes of the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 where the reach effect is started. That is, a predetermined combination of reach symbols is displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 where the reach effect is started, but the symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols also in the common symbol images G2 to G4. The combination of reach symbols by the same type of symbols G7 as G11 to G13 is displayed. Then, in the situation where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed, the rotation display in the central common symbol image G3 is executed. If the result of the win / fail judgment process is the winning result, the rotation display of the common symbol image G3 in the center is stopped while the symbol G7 constituting the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed, and the win / fail judgment process is performed. If the result is an out-of-game game, the rotation display of the central common symbol image G3 is stopped in a state where the symbol G7 different from the symbol G7 constituting the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed. In the reach effect, the common symbol images G2 to G4 will continue to be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect character G5 is displayed in a state where the common symbol images G2 to G4 are hidden or reduced. The display effect used may be executed, and in addition to or instead of hiding or reducing the common symbol images G2 to G4, the normal hold display area 42 is hidden to display the symbol display device. The entire display surface of 41 may be the decorative area 43.

When the reach effect is started in one of the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 and then the reach effect is started in the other, the decorative area 43 corresponds to the side where the reach effect is started first. Reach production is performed. In this case, even if the reach effect executed in the decorative area 43 is completed and the corresponding game times are completed in the situation where the reach effect is continued in the other individual display areas 45 and 47, the said game is concerned. In the decorative area 43, the reach effect corresponding to the reach effect continued in the other individual display areas 45 and 47 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize which of the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 is the execution target of the reach effect in the decorative area 43. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the situation where the reach effect is continued in the other individual display areas 45 and 47, the game corresponding to the end of the reach effect executed in the decorative area 43. When the times are completed, the decorative area 43 may be configured to start the reach effect corresponding to the reach effect continued in the other individual display areas 45 and 47.

Returning to the explanation of the game board 24 (see FIG. 3), when the determination result of the winning / failing determination process is the winning result, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode as described above. In the open / close execution mode, the open / close control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed. The special electric winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult to generate a prize than in the open state. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the game board 24 having the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 64 is provided above the window unit 61. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 61, an upper bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 67 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 66a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 67a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 66a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 71 has a main control board housed in a board box. In addition, the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded to each other, and a predetermined portion must be destroyed when the case is separated. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collecting unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 66a or the lower plate 67a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It includes a power supply / launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A certain RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 85 provided in the main control device 71 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82, and a payout control device 77 is also connected to the input side. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 85, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring board 85.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 86a to 86e are connected to the input side of the MPU 82. The various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e include a detection sensor 86a provided in the general winning opening 31, a detection sensor 86b provided in the special electric winning device 32, a detection sensor 86c provided in the first operating port 33, and a second operation. The detection sensor 86d provided in the mouth 34 and the detection sensor 86e provided in the through gate 35 are included. Based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e, the MPU 82 determines the winning of each winning ball. Further, in the MPU 82, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 91 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The payout control device 77 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on the result of winning determination to the prize-winning ball winning unit. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 91.

On the output side of the MPU 82, there is a drive unit 32b for special power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special power winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for special power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The drawing unit 37 and the drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a, a second special figure display unit 37b, a first special figure hold display unit 37c, and a second special figure hold display unit 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 38 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 38a and a normal drawing holding display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 81, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the MPU 82 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed in the MPU 82 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 82. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general drawing unit 38 is executed in the MPU 82.

The power failure monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control device 71, the payout control device 77, and the like are generated with the required operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied.

Specifically, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit 78a during power-on and a power supply unit 78b during power failure for the configuration for supplying the operating power. The power supply unit 78a during power-on is connected to a commercial power source in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. Has the function of The power supply unit 78b during power interruption is composed of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit 78a during power supply when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged by. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power is discharged from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Memory is retained.

Here, the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. Will be done. In this case, by supplying backup power to these RAMs from the power supply unit 78b during power interruption as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply, the current game It is possible to store the state, the progress of the game, and the unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the voice emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 95 of the voice emission control device 91 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply is stopped. It will be erased.

The capacity of the power supply unit 78b during power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main controller 71 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). To. The power supply unit 78b during power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like.

The power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown), which is different from the power supply unit 78b for power failure. In the power supply / emission control device 78, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit for power failure discharges the power for a sufficient period of time to execute the power failure process described later. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply for the control system, at a normal value. As a result, the main control device 71 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a launch control unit 78c in addition to the various power supply units 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the launch operation device 28 are electrically connected to the launch control unit 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the operation handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is emitted. Output to. Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the launch control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle. Further, the launch control unit 78c grasps whether or not the launch stop switch of the launch operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and also operates the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. Grasp the amount of rotation operation of.

The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition satisfaction signal of a predetermined signal form to the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the launch stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is continuously transmitted from the push sensor 28b to the MPU 82 as a HI level condition satisfaction signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction). If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 82. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition satisfying signal corresponding to the condition satisfying.

In the MPU 82, if the HI level condition satisfying signal is received and the launch of the game ball can be permitted, the launch control unit 78c is notified of the HI level launch permission signal (signal corresponding to the launch permission). Continue to send. When the MPU 82 does not receive the HI level condition satisfaction signal from the launch control unit 78c, the MPU 82 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal that does not correspond to the launch permission), but the launch permission signal LOW. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

The launch control unit 78c periodically drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 27 when the game ball launch mechanism 27 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 82. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). To. Further, at the time of this firing, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, the game ball is launched with the intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle.

The voice emission control device 91 includes a voice emission control board 92 on which the MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 is a ROM 94 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 93, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A certain RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. The MPU 93 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 based on the command received from the main control device 71, and transmits the command to the display control device 101.

The display control device 101 includes a display control board 102 on which the MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 is a ROM 104 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 103, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 104 is executed. A RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. The MPU 103 controls the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 91.

Although not shown, the display control board 102 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 103. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the main control device 71 are referred to as the main MPU 82, the main ROM 83 and the main RAM 84, and the MPU 93, ROM 94 and RAM 95 of the voice emission control device 91 are sound and light. The side MPU 93, the sound light side ROM 94, and the sound light side RAM 95 are referred to, and the MPU 103, ROM 104, and RAM 105 of the display control device 101 are referred to as a display side MPU 103, a display side ROM 104, and a display side RAM 105.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The main MPU 82 uses various counter information during the game to draw a winning lottery, set the display of the first special figure display unit 37a, set the display of the second special figure display unit 37b, and set the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. , The display of the general figure display unit 38a is set, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for hit occurrence and the jackpot type are used for determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 to be used, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure. The variable type counter CS for determining the variable display period in the display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41 is used. Further, the general electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the electric service open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the main RAM 84.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved for special figures provided in the main RAM 84 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the area 122. The special figure holding area 122 includes a first special figure holding area 125, a second special figure holding area 126, and an execution area 127 for special drawing.

The first special figure holding area 125 includes a first area 125a, a second area 125b, a third area 125c, and a fourth area 125d, and a winning random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 33. Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 125a to 125d as the first hold information. In this case, in the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 125a → the second area 125b → the third area 125c → the third. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 areas 125d. By providing the four areas 125a to 125d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure holding area 126 includes the first area 126a, the second area 126b, the third area 126c, and the fourth area 126d, and the hit random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the second operating port 34. Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 126a to 126d as the second hold information. In this case, in the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d, when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 126a → the second area 126b → the third area 126c → the third area 126c. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 126d. By providing the four areas 126a to 126d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The execution area 127 for the special drawing includes an execution area 127a for the first special drawing and an execution area 127b for the second special drawing. The execution area 127a for the first special figure stores the first hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail judgment, the distribution judgment, etc. for the special figure when the variable display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. The area. The execution area 127b for the second special figure stores the second hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail judgment, the distribution judgment, etc. for the special figure when the variable display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b. The area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the first hold information stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure hold area 125 is executed for the first special figure. Moved to area 127a. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the second hold information stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure hold area 126 is transferred to the execution area 127b for the second special figure. Will be moved.

The information corresponding to the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 123 when a prize is won in the through gate 35. The normal figure holding area 123 includes a first area 128a, a second area 128b, a third area 128c, and a fourth area 128d, and numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 128a to 128d as the reserved information on the normal drawing side. In this case, in the first area 128a to the fourth area 128d, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 128a → the second area 128b → the third area 128c → the fourth area. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 128d. By providing the four areas 128a to 128d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the holding area 123 is not limited to four, and may be any number of items, such as two, three, or five or more. It may be.

An execution area 129 for a normal map is provided in the normal map reservation area 128. The execution area 129 for the normal map is an area in which the hold information to be determined for support is stored when the variable display is started on the normal map display unit 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 128a of the normal map hold area 123 is moved to the execution area 129 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of "0" to "250" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The normal electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal figure holding area 123 of the main RAM 84 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored general electric random number counter C4.

As already described in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of being in the open state is relatively high or low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power open state in the normal power open lottery process using the normal power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric accessory 34a is opened when the general electric power open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric power open state is won and the general electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is performed (that is, the general drawing The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short (specifically, 2 seconds in the high frequency support mode and 10 seconds in the low frequency support mode).

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be given to the mouth 34 increases.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the open state per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode, and the configuration is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the open state. In addition, the secured time secured for the next public electric opening lottery after one public electric opening lottery is performed (for example, it is executed on the general drawing display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when one public power opening lottery is held and then the next public power opening lottery is held is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

When the normal power open state is won in the general power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4, the normal power open state is set. The open state of the general electric power is terminated when the public electric accessory 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined maximum number of game balls win a prize in the second operating port 34. To do. Specifically, regarding these contents, the upper limit number is 10 in common in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening and closing of the utility object 34a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas it is more than one in the high-frequency support mode, which is more specific than in the low-frequency support mode. It is 3 times. Further, the duration of one opening of the general electric accessory 34a is 1 second in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 3 seconds in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "599", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special figure holding area 125 of the special figure holding area 122, and the game ball is stored in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 of the special figure holding area 122 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the winning / failing determination is performed using the value of the stored hit random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination is stored in the main ROM 83 as a winning / failing table. In the win / fail table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the win / fail result. The jackpot result is a win / fail result that can trigger a shift to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also trigger a shift to at least one of the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode. The deviation result is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As the pass / fail table, a low accuracy table and a high accuracy table are provided. Two numerical information that will be a jackpot result are set in the low probability / rejection table (for example, "5" and "305"), and 20 numerical information that will be a jackpot result are set in the high probability / rejection table (for example, "5" and "305"). For example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", " 392 "," 420 "," 470 "," 495 "," 520 "," 558 "," 575 "," 599 "). The hit / miss lottery mode in which the low probability / hit / fail table is referred to in the hit / fail determination process is the low probability mode, and the win / loss lottery mode in which the high probability / hit / fail table is referred to in the hit / fail judgment process is the high probability mode. In the low probability mode (that is, the normal gaming state), when the hit / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and the winning of the second operating port 34. In any case where the hit / fail determination process is executed for the second hold information acquired based on, the low probability / hit / fail table is referred to. Further, in the high probability mode (that is, the high probability state), either the case where the hit / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information or the case where the hit / fail judgment process is executed for the second hold information. The high probability accuracy table is also referred to. In addition, all the types of numerical information that give a big hit result in the low probability hit / fail table are included in the types of numerical information that give a big hit result in the high probability hit / fail table. As a result, the hold information that results in a jackpot in the normal game state becomes the hold information that results in a jackpot even in the high probability state.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and values of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result is obtained. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of "0" to "29" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special drawing holding area 125 of the special drawing holding area 122, and the game ball is stored in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 of the special figure holding area 122 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the distribution determination process is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 83 as a distribution table. In the distribution table, low-accuracy jackpot results and high-accuracy jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results.

The low probability jackpot result triggers the start of the open / close execution mode. In addition, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the result is a jackpot that becomes a low probability mode regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode transition, and is low regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode transition. It is a jackpot result that becomes the frequency support mode. These low-probability modes and low-frequency support modes result in high-accuracy jackpots and are continued until the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the results is completed.

The most advantageous jackpot result triggers the start of the open / close execution mode. In addition, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the result is a big hit that becomes a high probability mode regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode transition, and is high regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode transition. It is a jackpot result that becomes the frequency support mode. These high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the distribution table, among the jackpot type counters C2 of "0" to "29", "0" to "14" correspond to the low accuracy jackpot result, and "15" to "29" correspond to the high accuracy jackpot result. It corresponds. Regardless of whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the distribution determination process is further executed for the first hold information and the second hold information. In any case, the same distribution table is referred to.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a reach effect is set as described above as a type of display effect in the symbol display device 41.

The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game round corresponding to the off result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 83. Is executed when corresponds to the occurrence of reach display.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of "0" to "198", and the value returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the main MPU 82 to determine the variation display period in the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and the variation display period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. To be acquired.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 82>
Next, each process executed to advance the game on the main MPU 82 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 82 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. After that, the access of the main RAM 84 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 82 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase button provided in the power supply / emission control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 84. (Step S105). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step). S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 84 is cleared as the initialization of the main RAM 84. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase button is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 84 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming states ST1 to ST4 is used to recognize the current gaming states ST1 to ST4. Is transmitted to the voice emission control device 91. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 77 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 77.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, but a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S110). Further, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (step S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 84, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set (step S113). After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started in a cycle of 4 msec.

First, the power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 85, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111 (step S203), and the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112 (step S204). After that, the game stop determination process is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. After that, the processes after step S207 are executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO).

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electric power is stopped.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, the winning detection process is executed (step S209). In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e are read, and the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are connected. Execute a process to specify the presence or absence of a ball.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 84 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S211). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop setting is made in the above step S205 in the next timer interrupt process. Affirmative determination is made in step S206.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S212). In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, as described above, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec so as to have a predetermined firing cycle.

After that, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e and the opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208 (step). S213).

After that, the first special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the execution control of the open / close execution mode triggered by the first hold information is executed (step S214). The second special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second hold information is executed (step S215). In addition, a support lottery for the public accessory 34a and a general public control process for controlling the opening and closing of the general public accessory 34a are executed (step S216). For details on the Fuzu Fuden control process, it is a condition that the number of hold information on the Fuzu side stored in the Fuzu hold area 123 is less than 4 when a prize is won in the through gate 35. As a result, the value of the normal electric random number counter C4 at that time is stored in the normal figure holding area 123. Further, in the Fuzu Fuden control process, the variable display of the pattern on the Fuzu display unit 38a is not executed, and the Fuden accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is controlled to open and close in a predetermined mode. When the holding information on the normal drawing side is stored in the normal drawing holding area 123 in the unopened state, the holding information on the normal drawing side stored in the first area 128a of the normal drawing holding area 123 is stored. Shift to the execution area 129 for normal drawing. Then, the Fuden open lottery process is executed for the reserved information on the Fuzu side, and the variable display of the pattern on the Fuzu display unit 38a is started. In this case, it is specified whether the support mode at that time is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and the variable display of the pattern is displayed over the variable display period corresponding to the support mode corresponding to the specific result. The display control of the normal map display unit 38a is executed so as to be executed. If the result of the public electric opening lottery process is the winning of the general electric opening state, the variable display of the pattern on the general drawing display unit 38a is terminated in the state where the corresponding pattern is stopped, and the result of the general electric opening lottery process. If is not won in the open state of the normal electric power, the variable display of the picture on the normal figure display unit 38a is terminated in a state in which the picture is stopped correspondingly. When the result of the general electric opening lottery process is that the general electric opening state is won and the variable display of the pattern on the general drawing display unit 38a is completed, the state is shifted to the general electric opening state. In the normal power open state, which of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is specified when the normal power open state is started is specified, and in the mode of the support mode corresponding to the specific result. The opening / closing control of the utility object 34a is executed. In the open / close execution mode, even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the display control of the normal figure display unit 38a and the general electric opening lottery process of the general electric accessory 34a correspond to the low-frequency support mode. And the opening / closing control of the general electric accessory 34a is executed.

After that, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 to S216, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the first hold information on the first special figure hold display unit 37c is set, and the increase / decrease number of the second hold information is set. The output information is set to be reflected in the second special figure hold display unit 37d, and the output information is set to be reflected in the normal figure hold display unit 38b on the increase / decrease number of the hold information on the normal figure side (step S217). .. Further, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 to S216, the output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set, and the normal map display is performed. Output information for updating the display contents of unit 38a is set (step S217).

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S218). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S219). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S220).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processes of steps S207 to S220 are executed, the timer interrupt process ends.

<1st special figure special electric control process and 2nd special figure special electric control process>
Next, the first special electric power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 10, and the step of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The second special figure special electric control process executed in S215 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the processing configurations of the first special figure special electric control process and the second special figure special electric control process are similar, the corresponding processing configurations will be described.

In the first special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed when a prize is generated in the first operation port 33, and when the first hold information is stored. A pass / fail judgment is made for the first hold information, and a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the hit / fail judgment as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the winning / failing determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect of the game round is executed, and the process of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

In the second special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, a process for acquiring the second hold information is executed, and when the second hold information is stored. A pass / fail judgment is made for the second hold information, and a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the hit / fail judgment as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the winning / failing determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect of the game round is executed, and the process of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the first reserved information acquisition process is first executed (step S301). Further, in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), first, the second reserved information acquisition process is executed (step S401).

In the acquisition process of the first reserved information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12A, a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 (step S501: YES), and further, in the first special figure reserved area 125. When the number of the first reserved information stored is less than the upper limit stored number (step S502: YES), the process for acquiring the first reserved information is executed. It should be noted that the monitoring process of whether or not a prize has been generated in the first operating port 33 is executed in the prize detection process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), and the prize has been generated. The winning data corresponding to the ball winning device in which the winning is generated is set in the main RAM 84. In step S501, it is determined whether or not the winning data is set in the main RAM 84.

In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the main RAM 84 is provided in order for the main MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125. The value of the first special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S503). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c corresponds to the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125.

After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125, that is, the storage number corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S503. Store in the area (step S504). After that, the setting process at the time of acquisition is executed (step S505). The details of the setting process at the time of acquisition will be described later, but the process for adjusting the duration of the game times, which is triggered by other hold information that has already been held and stored, according to the content of the hold information acquired this time. Run.

After that, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S506). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103, whereby the number of first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41. Is changed according to the increase in the number of pending items.

In the acquisition process of the second reserved information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12B, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 (step S601: YES), and further, in the second special figure reserved area 126. When the number of the second reserved information stored is less than the upper limit stored number (step S602: YES), the process for acquiring the second reserved information is executed. It should be noted that the monitoring process of whether or not a prize has been generated in the second operating port 34 is executed in the prize detection process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), and the prize has been generated. The winning data corresponding to the ball winning device in which the winning is generated is set in the main RAM 84. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the winning data is set in the main RAM 84.

In the process for acquiring the second hold information, first, the main RAM 84 is provided in order for the main MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126. The value of the second special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S603). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure reservation display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d corresponds to the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126.

After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126, that is, the number of storages corresponding to the number of reservations added by 1 in step S603. Store in the area (step S604). After that, the setting process at the time of acquisition is executed (step S605). The details of the setting process at the time of acquisition will be described later, but the process for adjusting the variable display period of the game times, which is triggered by other hold information already stored in hold, according to the content of the hold information acquired this time. To execute.

After that, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S606). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display side MPU 103 to display the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 and increase the number of holds. To change according to.

Returning to the description of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), after executing the hold information acquisition process (step S301 or step S401), the main ROM 83 is displayed. Read the stored special figure special electric address table (step S302, step S402). In the special figure special electric address table, the start of a program for executing the processing corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 and the second special electric special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84. The address is set.

The first special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) by the main MPU 82. The first special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling an effect for playing a game and a process for controlling an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game round, a special figure variation start process (step S305), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, and a process for advancing the effect for the game round. The special figure changing process (step S306), which is the process of, and the special figure finalizing process (step S307), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, as the process for controlling the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (step S308), which is the process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 32. The special electric power opening process (step S309), the special electric power closing process (step S310) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 32, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the end of the open / close execution mode. A special electric termination process (step S311), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state of the above, is set. When the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305) is executed, and when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "1", the special figure is executed. When the variable processing (step S306) is the execution target and the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure finalizing process (step S307) is the execution target and the first special figure special electric counter When the value is "3", the special electric power start process (step S308) is the execution target, and when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "4", the special electric power opening process (step S309) is the execution target. When the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "5", the special electric closing process (step S310) is executed, and when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "6", the special electric is executed. The end process (step S311) is the execution target.

The second special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) by the main MPU 82. Similar to the first special figure special electric control process, the second special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game round and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game round, a special figure variation start process (step S405), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, and a process for advancing the effect for the game round. The special figure changing process (step S406), which is the process of the above, and the special figure finalizing process (step S407), which is the process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, as the process for controlling the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (step S408), which is the process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 32. The special electric power opening process (step S409), the special electric power closing process (step S410) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 32, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the end of the open / close execution mode. A special electric termination process (step S411), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state of the above, is set. When the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S405) is executed, and when the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "1", the special figure is executed. When the variable processing (step S406) is the execution target and the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure finalizing process (step S407) is the execution target and the second special figure special electric counter When the value is "3", the special electric power start process (step S408) is the execution target, and when the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "4", the special electric power opening process (step S409) is the execution target. When the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "5", the special electric closing process (step S410) is executed, and when the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "6", the special electric is executed. The end process (step S411) is the execution target.

Regarding the special figure special electric address table Specifically, "0" to "6" of each special figure special electric counter correspond to the start addresses SA0 to SA6, and the start address SA0 corresponds to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305, step S305, The start address SA1 of the program for executing step S405) is the start address of the program for executing the special figure changing process (step S306, step S406), and the start address SA2 is the special figure confirmation. The start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the intermediate processing (step S307, step S407), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start processing (step S308, step S408), and the start address SA4. Is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power opening process (step S309, step S409), and the start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing process (step S310, step S410). , The start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power end processing (step S311 and step S411).

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S302, step S402), the corresponding special figure special electric counter The start address corresponding to the information is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S303, step S403), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S304, step S404). Hereinafter, special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305, step S405), special figure fluctuation processing (step S306, step S406), special figure determination processing (step S307, step S407), special electric power start processing (step S308, step S408). ), The special electric power opening process (step S309, step S409), the special electric power closing process (step S310, step S410), and the special electric power ending process (step S311, step S411) will be described individually.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in steps S305 and S405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) this time (step S701). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be executed in the other. In this case, if step S701 is executed and the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) this time, the processes after step S702 are executed. The start of a new game is restricted without. As a result, in the situation where the open / close execution mode is executed triggered by the game times in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times in the other are not newly started. Be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the open / close execution mode. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), it is determined in step S701 whether or not the value of the second special figure special electric counter is 3 or more, and 3 or more. If this is the case, the processing after step S702 is not executed, and if this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is 3 or more. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the above is true, and if it is 3 or more, the processing after step S702 is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined whether or not the corresponding number of pending items is one or more (step S702). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), it is determined whether or not one or more first reserved information is stored in the first special figure holding area 125, and this time If it is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not one or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 126.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the data setting process is executed (step S703). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure holding area 125 is set to the execution area 127a for the first special figure. Moving. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 125 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 125a and the second area 125b →. The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area 125a, 3rd area 125c → 2nd area 125b, 4th area 125d → 3rd area 125c. After that, the value of the first special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a first reduction command indicating that the first holding information in the first special figure holding area 125 has been reduced by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrementing command to the display side MPU 103, so that the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 can be obtained. Change the number display to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending information.

In the data setting process, if this time is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is transferred to the execution area 127b for the second special figure. Moving. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area 126a and the second area 126b →. The data in each area is shifted such as the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c. After that, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second reduction command indicating that the second holding information in the second special figure holding area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display side MPU 103 to display the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 of the hold information. Change in response to the decrease in the number.

After executing the data setting process, the game round is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) this time, and the hold information that triggered the start of the game round is the jackpot result. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to (step S704). The main RAM 84 is set with a first low-accuracy jackpot flag and a first high-accuracy jackpot flag corresponding to the first hold information, and a second low-accuracy jackpot flag and a second corresponding to the second hold information. A high-accuracy jackpot flag is set. The first low-accuracy jackpot flag is set to "1" when it is specified that the first low-accuracy jackpot flag corresponds to the result of executing the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process for the first hold information. This is a flag that is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode triggered by the first hold information is terminated. The first high-accuracy jackpot flag is set to "1" when it is specified that it corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result as a result of executing the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process for the first hold information. This is a flag that is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode triggered by the first hold information is terminated. The second low-accuracy jackpot flag is set to "1" when it is specified that the second low-accuracy jackpot flag corresponds to the result of executing the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process for the second hold information. This is a flag that is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode triggered by the second hold information is terminated. The second high-accuracy jackpot flag is set to "1" when it is specified that the second high-accuracy jackpot flag corresponds to the result of executing the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process for the second hold information. This is a flag that is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode triggered by the second hold information is terminated. In step S704, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), "1" is set in the second low accuracy jackpot flag or the second high accuracy jackpot flag of the main RAM 84. If this is the special figure fluctuation start process of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the first low accuracy jackpot flag or the first high accuracy jackpot flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". Is set or not.

If a negative determination is made in step S704, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S705). In the winning / failing determination process, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low probability winning / failing table is set to the main ROM83 regardless of whether the game round is started in the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability winning / failing table is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the game start target is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. .. After reading the pass / fail table, the pass / fail judgment is made from the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round. Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit / fail table.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result (step S706: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S707). In the distribution determination process, a common distribution table is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of the current game state and the types of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are the start targets of the game times. Then, from the hold information stored on the side of the execution area 127a for the first special drawing and the execution area 127b for the second special drawing, which is the start target of the current game round, the information for distribution determination, that is, the jackpot type. By reading the numerical information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process (step S708). Specifically, when the start target of the game round is the first hold information and the first hold information corresponds to the low probability jackpot result, "1" is set in the first low probability jackpot flag. If the start target of the game round is the first hold information and the first hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, "1" is set in the first high-accuracy jackpot flag and the game round start target. Is the second hold information, and if the second hold information corresponds to the low probability jackpot result, "1" is set in the second low probability jackpot flag, and the start target of the game round is the second hold information. If the second hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, "1" is set in the second high-accuracy jackpot flag. In the following description, the determination process of whether or not the result is various jackpots is performed by determining whether or not "1" is set in the corresponding flag of the main RAM 84. Further, the state in which "1" is set in step S708 is cleared to "0" when the opening / closing execution mode ends and the special electric power termination process described later ends.

After executing the flag set process for the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S709). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of this game, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the jackpot result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S709, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S708 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the jackpot results. The method of selecting the stop result for the jackpot result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of symbols are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is not the jackpot result (step S706: NO), the stop result setting process for the off result is executed (step S710). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result, and is common to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. It is one type of.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S704, that is, the game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) this time, and the hold that triggered the start of the game round. When the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the missed result already described is executed without executing the hit / fail determination process (step S710). That is, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game round is being executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game round can be started in the other. However, if the hold information that triggered the start of the already executed game round corresponds to one of the jackpot results, the hold information that triggered the start of the newly executed game round will be used. Regardless of whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, it will be a game time corresponding to the off result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the jackpot results from being executed twice. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the start of a new game round is prevented when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, the hold information for which the game round is to be started is also acquired. Regardless, it may become clear that the game times currently being executed are the game times corresponding to the jackpot result when a new game time is not started, but the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring by configuring the configuration so that a new game round can be started.

When the process of step S709 or step S710 is executed, the specific process of the variable display period is executed (step S711). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the variable display period. In the process of specifying the variable display period, first, of the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, the side on which the hold information that is the start target of the current game round is stored. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the provided set flag (step S801). The details of the set flag will be described later, but if the variable display period of the game time corresponding to the hold information that is the start target of this game time is determined as the adjustment period, the data corresponding to it will be displayed. This is an area for setting. When "1" is set in the set flag (step S801: YES), the corresponding process (step S806) is executed, and the content of the process will be described later.

When "1" is not set in the set flag (step S801: NO), the variation display period table is read from the main ROM 83 (step S802). Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the game times that are the target of this start correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, when the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, that is, the game times to be started this time among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. When "1" is set in either the low-accuracy jackpot flag or the high-accuracy jackpot flag on the side of the player, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. Further, even if the game times to be started this time do not correspond to the jackpot result, the game of this time out of the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure. When the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the side that is the start target of the round is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. When it is determined that the reach effect is generated, the variation display period table for reach generation stored in the main ROM 83 is read from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, it is stored in the main ROM 83. The variable display period table for non-reach generation is read from the main ROM 83.

After that, the current numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired (step S803), and the variation display period is determined by collating with the variation display period table read out in step S802 (step S804). Then, the information of the determined fluctuation display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S805). The special figure special electric timer counter is provided corresponding to each of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. In step S805, information on the fluctuation display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variation display of the pattern on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed, and each of these variation displays is performed. When it is terminated, the state in which the stop result of the game round is displayed is displayed as the final stop over the final stop period. In this case, the information of the variable display period read out in step S804 is the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the continuation period of the game times. In other words, the duration of the game is the sum of the variable display period and the final suspension period. This also applies to the variable display period read out in step S806.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13), after executing the specification processing of the fluctuation display period, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are sent to the sound light side MPU93 Is transmitted to (step S712). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S711, and the game times to be started is set to either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. Further, the variable command includes information on whether or not to execute the reach effect. If the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, the information that directly indicates whether or not to execute the reach effect is the change command. It may not be set to. The type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any type of jackpot result. Information indicating that is included.

After that, in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S713). If the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S714). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is processed during the special figure change ( It becomes "1" corresponding to step S306, step S406).

<Processing content of MPU93 on the sound light side>
As described above, the information of the fluctuation display period read out as described above is set in the fluctuation command and transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The processing configuration for controlling the execution of the effect for the game round on the sound light side MPU 93 will be described below. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a sound light side MPU 93 with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

First, the table setting process for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 82 is executed (step S901). FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a table setting process. When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 82 (step S1001: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S1002). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the result of the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment determined by the main MPU 82 at the start of this game round is specified, and the specified information is used on the sound light side. Write to RAM 95.

After that, it is determined whether or not the information of the fluctuation display period included in the fluctuation command is the information corresponding to the adjustment period (step S1003). The details of the adjustment period will be described later, but when the content of the newly acquired hold information is the content of the adjustment occurrence target, it is set as the duration of the game times corresponding to the hold information acquired at that time. It is a period. When the adjustment period is supported (step S1003: YES), the effect setting process (step S1007) corresponding to the adjustment period is executed, and the content of the process will be described later.

If it does not correspond to the adjustment period (step S1003: NO), a process for determining the content of the effect at the time of non-adjustment is executed. As the process for making the determination, first, the effect lottery process is executed (step S1004). In the production lottery process, when the current game time is a game time for which the first special figure display unit 37a is the execution target in the normal game state, the game time for which the first special figure display unit 37a is the execution target in the high probability state. In the case of, or when the second special figure display unit 37b is the game time to be executed in the high probability state, the execution content of the effect in the decoration area 43 of the symbol display device 41 is determined by lottery. For example, the operation pattern of the effect character G5 is determined by lottery, or the image display pattern other than the effect character G5 is determined by lottery. In this case, if the game times that are the target of this start are big hit results, the selection probability of the high expectation effect is higher than the selection probability of the low expectation effect, and the game times that are the target of this time are If the result is off, the selection probability of the low expectation effect is higher than the selection probability of the high expectation effect. Further, in the effect lottery process, when the current game time is a game time for which the first special figure display unit 37a is the execution target in the normal game state, the first special figure display unit 37a is the execution target in the high probability state. If it is a game time, or if the second special figure display unit 37b is a game time to be executed in a high probability state and a reach effect occurs, the type of reach effect is selected by lottery. decide. In this case, if the game number to be started this time is a big hit result, the selection probability of the high expectation reach effect is higher than the selection probability of the low expectation reach effect, and the game to be started this time. If the result is missed, the selection probability of the low expectation reach effect is higher than the selection probability of the high expectation reach effect.

On the other hand, when the current game time is a game time in which the second special figure display unit 37b is the target of variable display in the normal game state, the fixed effect pattern is determined without executing the effect lottery process. When the second special figure display unit 37b is a variable display target in the normal game state, as described above, the corresponding effect of the game rotation in the symbol display device 41 is in the additional decorative area 44 which is a part of the decorative area 43. Is done. Then, in the effect for the game round in the additional decorative area 44, although the variations of the symbols G8 to G10 are displayed on the front side of the background image, the display effects other than these are not executed. Therefore, as described above, in the normal game state, when the second special figure display unit 37b is the game number to be the variable display target, the fixed effect pattern is determined.

After executing the effect lottery process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1005). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low probability jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result this time. If the game result of the game times is a high-accuracy jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game time is a deviation result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the content of the change command. Then, when the reach effect occurs, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established and the combination of the reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, the information corresponding to the stop result in which both the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the reach symbols are not established is determined as the information of the stop result this time.

After that, the control table reading process corresponding to the execution content of the effect in the current game round is executed (step S1006). In the process, the information of the variation display period is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, the information of the variation display period, the information of the game result specified in step S1002, and the effect lottery in step S1004. The control table corresponding to the combination of the processing result information and the stop result information determined in step S1005 is read from the sound light side ROM 94 and written to the sound light side RAM 95. In the control table, the content of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 corresponding to the effect for the current game round and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 corresponding to the effect for the current game round are set. Therefore, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are performed according to the control table.

After that, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S1008). The variation pattern command includes information on the variation display period of the game times to be started, information indicating whether the game times to be started corresponds to the jackpot result or the miss result, and the start. Information indicating which of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b the target game times corresponds to, and the information on the result of the effect lottery process in step S1004. Information on the stop result determined in step S1005 is included. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display side MPU 103 starts the display control for executing the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41. The contents of the display control will be described later.

In the table setting process, other processes are executed in addition to the above processes (step S1009). In other processes, a process for controlling the execution of the effect is executed in a situation other than the above. For example, in the open / close execution mode, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 read out a table for executing and controlling the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the first hold command indicating that the first hold information is newly acquired is received from the main MPU 82, the first hold command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103, and the second hold information is newly acquired. When the second hold command indicating that is received from the main MPU 82, the second hold command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103. When the first decrease command indicating that the first hold information has decreased is received from the main MPU 82, the first decrease command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 to indicate that the second hold information has decreased. When the second decrease command is received from the main MPU 82, the second decrease command is transmitted to the display MPU 103.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), after executing the table setting process, the light emission control process is executed (step S902) and the sound output control process is executed (step S903). In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 is performed according to the table read out to the sound light side RAM 95 in the table setting process of step S901. Further, in the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is performed according to the table read out to the sound / light side RAM 95 in the table setting process of step S901. After that, the pointer update process is executed (step S904). In the pointer update process, information is set for updating the data to be referred to in the table read in the table setting process of step S901 to the data corresponding to the next control process.

<Processing content of display side MPU 103>
Next, a processing configuration for controlling the execution of the effect for the game round on the display side MPU 103 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing that is repeatedly activated by the display side MPU 103 at a predetermined cycle, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

In the V interrupt process, when a command is received from the sound / light side MPU 93 (step S1101: YES), the command correspondence process is executed. In the command correspondence process, the display pattern table for executing the display effect corresponding to the command received from the sound light side MPU 93 on the symbol display device 41 is read from the display side ROM 104 and written to the display side RAM 105. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the display pattern table for executing the display effect for game rounds corresponding to the variation pattern command on the symbol display device 41 is read out. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the game times can be executed even if the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. In order to correspond to this, the symbol display device 41 executes an effect corresponding to each of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b. When the game times are executed by both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the production for the game times corresponding to the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second The display pattern table corresponding to each of the effects for the game times corresponding to the game times in the special figure display unit 37b is read out, and the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed in the manner corresponding to those two display pattern tables. Will be done. In this case, in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 4B, the effect for the game round corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b is executed in the additional decorative area 44, and the first special figure display unit The effect for the game round corresponding to 37a is executed in the decorative area 43 in an area other than the additional decorative area 44. Further, in the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 5A, the effect for the game round corresponding to the first special figure display unit 37a is executed in the first individual display area 45 and the second special figure display. The effect for the game times corresponding to the part 37b is executed in the second individual display area 47, and the effect for the game times on the side where the reach effect is started earlier is not limited to the corresponding individual display areas 45 and 47. It is also executed in the decorative area 43.

When a negative determination is made in step S1101 or when the process of step S1102 is executed, the pointer update process is executed (step S1103). In the pointer update process, information is set for updating the data to be referred to in the display pattern table read in the command correspondence process in step S1102 to the data corresponding to the current control process times.

After that, the task process is executed (step S1104). In the task processing, by referring to the data set in the area corresponding to the current control processing time in the currently read display pattern table, the image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing is displayed as a symbol. The parameters necessary for displaying on the device 41 are calculated. After that, the drawing list output process is executed (step S1105). In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time on the symbol display device 41 is created, and the created drawing list is provided on the display control board 102. It is transmitted to a VDP (not shown). In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP creates drawing data in a frame area of VRAM (not shown) according to this drawing list, so that the symbol display device 41 displays an image for one frame.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S306 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S406 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

When the variable display period of the current game times on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled has not elapsed and the display content of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is updated, the special figure Data is set for updating the display contents of the display units 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the following order.

The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a certain mode regardless of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result, and the symbol display device. It is performed in a certain manner regardless of the content of the effect for the game round in 41. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period elapses, the display pattern is concerned. Regardless of the order in which the game is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game is displayed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the variable display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The final stop command includes information corresponding to the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b whose variable display period has elapsed. After that, the information on the stop mode of the pattern of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 at the start of the game round, which is the target of ending this time, is read out. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled.

After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the special figure changing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is the special figure finalizing process ( It becomes "2" corresponding to step S307 and step S407).

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, refer to the flowchart of FIG. 18 for the special figure finalizing process executed in step S307 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S407 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11). I will explain while.

When the final stop period has passed (step S1201: YES) and the game result of the current game is a jackpot result (step S1202: YES), the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10, FIG. By determining whether or not the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side not corresponding to FIG. 11) is "0", the special figure on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) The display units 37a and 37b determine whether or not the game is being executed (step S1203). If the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is not "0" (step S1203: NO), the process during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is. Does not execute the process for starting the open / close execution mode. As a result, the special figure display on the side in which the game times are executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b and the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are executed. When the game times in the units 37a and 37b are completed first, the open / close execution mode is started after the game times in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side where the game times have not been completed are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the running game times from being forcibly ended at the end of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, and even though the game times are being executed. It is possible to prevent the open / close execution mode from being started.

By the way, as already explained, in the situation where the open / close execution mode is executed triggered by the game times in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times in the other are not newly started. It is a composition. By having the configuration and the configuration of step S1203, the game round is not executed in the situation where the open / close execution mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result of the game in the situation where the game is being executed, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the open / close execution mode in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. It becomes.

When the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the special special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is "0" (step S1203: YES), the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 84 is set. “15” is set (step S1204). The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the remaining number of executions of the round game by the main MPU 82.

After that, the information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time. (Step S1205). After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S1206). As a result, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. In addition, the duration area clearing process is executed (step S1207). The details of the clearing process will be described later, but if the adjustment period has already been set as the duration of the game for the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the start of this game, it will be deleted. Perform the process to do so.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S1208). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is the special electric start processing (step S308). , Step S408) corresponds to "3".

In the process during the determination of the special figure, when the final stop period has elapsed (step S1201: YES) and the game result of the current game round is not the jackpot result (step S1202: NO), the current process is the first. 1 If it corresponds to the special figure special electric control process (Fig. 10), clear the value of the 1 special figure special electric counter to "0", and this process corresponds to the 2 special figure special electric control process (Fig. 11). If so, the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1209). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305, step S405).

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step S308 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S408 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

In the special electric power start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the open / close execution mode has elapsed. If the opening period has not passed, the special electric power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect of the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power start processing is started every time the special electric power control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has elapsed, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter to be controlled, and the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 is provided. Information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the maximum number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is set. Then, the open setting process for the special electric power is executed. In the open setting process, data is set so that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric start processing is executed is "3", the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is the processing during opening of the special electric power (step S309, step S309 It becomes "4" corresponding to step S409).

<Processing while the special electric power is open>
Next, the processing during opening of the special electric power executed in step S309 of the first special electric power control process (FIG. 10) and step S409 of the second special electric power control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

In the processing during opening of the special electric power, when the opening continuous period of the special electric power winning device 32 has elapsed or when the special electric power winning device 32 has been awarded the maximum number of winning balls, the closing setting process is executed. In the closing setting process, data is set so that the special electric winning device 32 is closed. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. After that, the value of the round counter RC of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC after the 1 subtraction is "0".

When the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) corresponds to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time. Figure Set to the special electric timer counter. After that, in order to switch the process to be controlled to the process during closing of the special electric power (step S310, step S410), if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the first special figure special electric power The value of the counter is added by 1, and if the current processing corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the special electric special electric power opening process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is the special electric power closed processing (step S310). , Step S410) corresponds to "5".

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0", the information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) corresponds to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time. Special figure Set in the special electric timer counter. Also, the ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. As a result, the effect corresponding to the ending period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. After that, in order to switch the process to be controlled to the special electric end processing (step S311, step S411), if the current processing corresponds to the first special electric special electric control process (FIG. 10), the first special electric special electric counter. If the current processing corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by two. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the special electric special electric power opening process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter that is the target of the addition by adding 2 is the special electric power end processing (step S311 It becomes "6" corresponding to step S411).

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the special electric closing process executed in step S310 of the first special electric special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S410 of the second special electric special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

When the closing continuation period has elapsed, the information on the opening duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter to be controlled, and once in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. Information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the maximum number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is set. Then, the open setting process for the special electric power is executed. In the open setting process, data is set so that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special electric special electric power closing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter that is the target of the subtraction by subtracting 1 is the special electric power opening processing (step S309). , Step S409) corresponds to "4".

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric termination process executed in step S311 of the first special electric special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S411 of the second special electric special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

If the ending period has elapsed, the game state setting process is executed. In the game state setting process, when "1" is set in the first high-probability jackpot flag or the second high-probability jackpot flag of the main RAM 84, the jackpot result that triggered the start of the opening / closing execution mode this time. Is a high-accuracy jackpot result, so "1" is set in the high-probability flag and the support flag provided in the main RAM 84. The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and the support flag is the main side indicating whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. It is a flag for specifying by MPU82. By setting "1" to the high probability flag and the support flag, the gaming state becomes the high probability state. Further, in the game state setting process, when "1" is set in the first low-probability jackpot flag or the second low-probability jackpot flag of the main RAM 84, this triggers the start of the opening / closing execution mode. Since it means that the jackpot result is a low probability jackpot result, both the high probability flag and the support flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0". When the values of the high probability flag and the support flag become "0", the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and this process is the second special figure special electric control. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305, step S405).

<Adjustment of the duration of the game using the look-ahead of the reserved information>
Next, a configuration for adjusting the duration of the game times by using the look-ahead of the reserved information will be described.

As described above, even if one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is executing the game round, the game round can be started on the other side. , If a new game round is started in a situation where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, the hold information that triggered the start of the newly started game round is put off and the hold corresponding to the result is held. Treated as information. In this case, if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed and the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result triggers the start of a new game round, the hold information that should correspond to the jackpot result Will be treated as corresponding to the off result, and the occurrence of the jackpot result of the newly started game times will be effectively invalidated.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired in a high probability state in which the execution of the game times is likely to occur in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the acquisition thereof is performed. It pre-reads whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result at the timing, and if it is specified that it corresponds to the jackpot result, the hold information acquired earlier than the hold information is the start trigger. The duration of the game times in the case of becoming, and the duration of the game times in the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the start trigger are set in the predetermined adjustment period. As a result, in the situation where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, the game round is started with the hold information that should originally correspond to the jackpot result as the start trigger. It is possible to invalidate the jackpot result corresponding to the information. In addition, in the situation where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, the jackpot result corresponding to the hold information is prevented from starting the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. Can be prevented from being invalidated.

The adjustment of the duration of the game round based on the pre-reading is executed only for the first hold information if the newly acquired hold information is the first hold information, and is not executed for the second hold information. Further, the adjustment of the duration of the game round based on the above look-ahead is executed only for the second hold information if the newly acquired hold information is the second hold information, and is executed for the first hold information. Not done. As a result, the adjustment of the duration of the game times triggered by the acquisition of the first hold information is limited to the game times corresponding to the first hold information, and the adjustment of the duration of the game times triggered by the acquisition of the second hold information is performed. Can be limited to the game times corresponding to the second hold information, and it is possible to prevent the processing load for adjusting the duration of the game times from being extremely increased.

In addition, the method of adjusting the duration of the game round is whether the newly acquired hold information is the first hold information or the second hold information, and the jackpot corresponding to the newly acquired hold information. Uniquely corresponds to the combination of the type of result and the number of stored information of the same system (either the first reserved information or the second reserved information) as the reserved information at the timing when the reserved information is newly acquired. It is set. That is, the game is played without considering the execution status of the game times at the timing when the hold information is newly acquired and the number of stored information of the system different from the hold information at the timing when the hold information is newly acquired. How to adjust the duration of the times is decided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load for adjusting the duration of the game times from being extremely increased.

Hereinafter, how to adjust the duration of the game times will be specifically described. First, how to adjust the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. Will be described. 19 (a) to 19 (g) show that one of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration of a game times in a case. Since the adjustment of the duration of the game times is executed in the high probability state and not in the normal game state, the following description will be given on the premise that the game state is in the high probability state.

As shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (c), when one or more first hold information is acquired and the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is newly acquired, it has already been acquired. The total duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is adjusted to be 120 seconds, which is the first adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where three first hold information is acquired, the three already acquired information are acquired. Each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of is set to 40 seconds obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by "3" which is the number of acquired first hold information. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, when the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where two first hold information is acquired, the two already acquired information are acquired. Each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of is set to 60 seconds obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by "2" which is the number of acquired first hold information. Further, as shown in FIG. 19C, when one first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where one first hold information is acquired, one already acquired one. The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of is set to 120 seconds, which is obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by "1" which is the number of acquired hold information. Further, as shown in FIGS. 19A to 19D, the duration of the game round of the first reserved information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is set to 1 second, which is the first trigger adjustment period.

On the other hand, when one or more second hold information is acquired as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (f) and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired, The duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information that has already been acquired is set to 1 second, which is the shortest adjustment period. Further, as shown in FIGS. 19A to 19G, the duration of the game round of the second reserved information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is set to 250 seconds, which is the second trigger adjustment period.

By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired as the first hold information. In addition, when the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, the low-accuracy jackpot result is executed in the situation where the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is executed. It becomes easy to start the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to. Specifically, if the duration of the game is not adjusted, the duration of the game that can be selected is 1 to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game round corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is 120 seconds, and the maximum time is 220 seconds. On the other hand, the minimum time required for the second special figure display unit 37b to start the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is 0 seconds, the maximum time is 103 seconds, and the second special figure display unit 37b. The duration of the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result on the figure display unit 37b is 250 seconds.

In this case, the time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game round corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result is 120 seconds, which is the minimum time, and the high accuracy jackpot result on the second special figure display unit 37b. Even if the time required to start the game round corresponding to is 103 seconds, which is the maximum time, the difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 17 seconds, which is shorter than the second trigger adjustment period of 250 seconds. Therefore, in a situation where the second special figure display unit 37b is executing the game times corresponding to the high accuracy jackpot result, the game times of the first reserved information corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a. Will be started, and the low probability jackpot result will be invalidated. Further, the time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game round corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result is 220 seconds, which is the maximum time, and the second special figure display unit 37b produces the high accuracy jackpot result. Even if the time required to start the corresponding game round is 0 seconds, which is the minimum time, the difference between the maximum time and the minimum time is 220 seconds, which is shorter than the second trigger adjustment period of 250 seconds. Therefore, in a situation where the second special figure display unit 37b is executing the game times corresponding to the high accuracy jackpot result, the game times of the first reserved information corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a are executed. It will be started and the low probability jackpot result will be invalidated.

However, as shown in FIG. 19D, when the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the first hold information is not acquired, the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired. Before the held information triggers the start of the game round, the first special figure display unit 37a cannot execute the game round for the first adjustment total period. In this case, the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result may be started earlier than the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result. Highly sexual. In this configuration, the duration of the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is set to 1 second, so that the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result. Is being executed, the possibility that the game round will be started triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result will be reduced, and the possibility that the high-accuracy jackpot result will be invalidated. It is possible to reduce it.

The state in which the low-accuracy jackpot result is invalidated will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (f). FIG. 20 (a) shows the duration of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a, FIG. 20 (b) shows the acquisition timing of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result, and FIG. 20 (c). Indicates the number of first reserved information stored on hold, FIG. 20 (d) shows the duration of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b, and FIG. 20 (e) corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result. The acquisition timing of the second hold information is shown, and FIG. 20 (f) shows the number of the second hold information stored in the hold.

First, in a situation where one first hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result is stored, the first hold information corresponding to the low-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, and three second hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result are stored. A case where the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (d), at the timing of t1, which is a situation in which game rounds are executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, FIG. As shown in 20 (b), the first reserved information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 20 (c), the number of reserved first reserved information is increased from one to two. In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information already stored is set to 120 seconds, which is the first adjustment total period, and the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time are set. The duration is set to 1 second, which is the first trigger adjustment period.

After that, when the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are completed, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 20 (a). In this case, the first adjustment total period has already been set as the continuation period of the game round for the first hold information that triggers the start of the game round. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 will continue over the first adjustment total period.

After that, at the timing of t3, the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired as shown in FIG. 20 (e), and the number of holds of the second hold information is three as shown in FIG. 20 (f). Increases from to 4. In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to each second hold information already stored is set to 1 second, which is the shortest adjustment period, and the continuation of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is set. The period is set to 250 seconds, which is the second trigger adjustment period.

After that, at the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6, which are the situations in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose duration is set to the first adjustment total period are continued, FIG. As shown in d) and FIG. 20 (f), the game rounds having the shortest adjustment period are started. Further, at the timing of t7 in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose duration is set to the first adjustment total period are still continuing, FIGS. 20 (d) and 20 (f) are shown. As shown, the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is started. This game round continues for 250 seconds, which is the second trigger adjustment period.

After that, at the timing of t8, which is a situation in which the game rounds triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result continue, the accuracy is low as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (c). The game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is started. In this case, since the first hold information is treated as a loss result without executing the pass / fail determination process, the low probability jackpot result is invalidated.

Next, in a situation where three first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored, the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired, and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are executed. The case where the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the second hold information is not obtained will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), at the timing of t9, which is the situation where the game round is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, as shown in FIG. 20 (e), the high-accuracy jackpot result corresponds to the second. 2 Hold information is acquired. In this case, since the second hold information is not separately stored and the game round is not executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, the second reserved information is displayed at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 20 (d). The game round is started with the second hold information corresponding to the acquired high-accuracy jackpot result as an opportunity. The duration of the game is set to 250 seconds, which is the second trigger adjustment period.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (d), at the timing of t10, which is a situation in which game rounds are executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. , As shown in FIG. 20 (b), the first reserved information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 20 (c), the number of reserved first reserved information increases from 3 to 4. .. In this case, each of the durations of the game times corresponding to each of the first reserved information already stored is set to 40 seconds, which is the result of dividing the first adjustment total period by "3", and is acquired this time. The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is set to 1 second, which is the first trigger adjustment period.

After that, at the timing of t11, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13, which are the situations in which the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b whose duration is set to the second trigger adjustment period are continuing, FIG. As shown in a) and FIG. 20 (c), game rounds having a duration of 40 seconds are started, respectively. Further, at the timing of t14 in which the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b whose duration is set to the second trigger adjustment period are still continuing, FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (c) are shown. As shown, the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is started. In this case, since the first hold information is treated as a loss result without executing the pass / fail determination process, the low probability jackpot result is invalidated. In addition, the game round continues for 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (a), at the timing of t15, which is the timing after the game round of the first trigger adjustment period in the first special figure display unit 37a is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (d). 2 The game times corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the special figure display unit 37b are completed. In this case, the open / close execution mode is started with the high accuracy jackpot result as a trigger.

Next, adjustment of the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the low-accuracy jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. I will explain how to do it. 21 (a) to 21 (g) show that one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the low-accuracy jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration of a game times in a case. Since the adjustment of the duration of the game times is executed in the high probability state and not in the normal game state, the following description will be given on the premise that the game state is in the high probability state.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (e) to 21 (f), the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where one or more second hold information is acquired. If so, the total duration of the game times corresponding to the already acquired second hold information is adjusted to be 480 seconds, which is the second adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where three second hold information is acquired, the three already acquired information are acquired. Each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the second hold information of is set to 160 seconds obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by the number of acquired second hold information "3". Further, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), when the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where two second hold information are acquired, the two already acquired information are acquired. Each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the second hold information of is set to 240 seconds obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by "2" which is the number of acquired second hold information. Further, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), when one second hold information is newly acquired and the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where one second hold information is acquired, one already acquired. The duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information of is set to 480 seconds, which is obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by "1" which is the number of acquired second hold information. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (g), the duration of the game round of the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is set to 1 second, which is the first trigger adjustment period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c), when one or more first hold information is acquired and the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired, The total duration of the game times corresponding to the already acquired first hold information is adjusted to be 360 seconds, which is the third adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where three first hold information is acquired, the three already acquired information are acquired. Each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of is set to 120 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by "3" which is the number of acquired first hold information. Further, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where two first hold information is acquired, the two already acquired information are acquired. Each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of the above is set to 180 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by the number of acquired first hold information "2". Further, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), when one first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where one first hold information is acquired, one already acquired one. The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of is set to 360 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by "1" which is the number of acquired first hold information. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (g), the duration of the game round of the first reserved information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is set to 600 seconds, which is the third trigger adjustment period.

By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired as the second hold information. In addition, when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, the low-accuracy jackpot result is executed in the situation where the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is executed. It becomes easy to start the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to. Specifically, if the duration of the game is not adjusted, the duration of the game that can be selected is 1 to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for the second special figure display unit 37b to start the game round corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result is 480 seconds, and the maximum time is 580 seconds. On the other hand, the minimum time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is 0 seconds, the maximum time is 460 seconds, and the first special figure is displayed. The duration of the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result on the figure display unit 37a is 600 seconds.

In this case, the time required for the second special figure display unit 37b to start the game round corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result is 480 seconds, which is the minimum time, and the high accuracy jackpot result on the first special figure display unit 37a. Even if the time required to start the game round corresponding to is 460 seconds, which is the maximum time, the difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 20 seconds, which is shorter than the third trigger adjustment period of 600 seconds. Therefore, in a situation where the first special figure display unit 37a is executing the game times corresponding to the high accuracy jackpot result, the game times of the second reserved information corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result in the second special figure display unit 37b. Will be started, and the low probability jackpot result will be invalidated. Further, the time required for the second special figure display unit 37b to start the game round corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result is 580 seconds, which is the maximum time, and the high accuracy jackpot result is obtained on the first special figure display unit 37a. Even if the time required to start the corresponding game round is 0 seconds, which is the minimum time, the difference between the maximum time and the minimum time is 580 seconds, which is shorter than the third trigger adjustment period of 600 seconds. Therefore, in a situation where the first special figure display unit 37a is executing the game times corresponding to the high accuracy jackpot result, the game times of the second reserved information corresponding to the low accuracy jackpot result in the second special figure display unit 37b are executed. It will be started and the low probability jackpot result will be invalidated.

However, as shown in FIG. 21 (g), when the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the second hold information is not acquired, the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired. Before the hold information triggers the start of the game round, the second special figure display unit 37b cannot execute the game round over the second adjustment total period. In this case, the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result may be started earlier than the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result. Highly sexual. In this configuration, the duration of the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is set to 1 second, so that the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result. Is being executed, the possibility that the game round will be started triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is reduced, and the possibility that the high-accuracy jackpot result will be invalidated. It is possible to reduce it.

The state in which the low-accuracy jackpot result is invalidated will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (f). FIG. 22 (a) shows the duration of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a, FIG. 22 (b) shows the acquisition timing of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result, and FIG. 22 (c) shows. Indicates the number of first reserved information stored on hold, FIG. 22 (d) shows the duration of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b, and FIG. 22 (e) corresponds to the low probability jackpot result. The acquisition timing of the second hold information is shown, and FIG. 22 (f) shows the number of the second hold information stored in the hold.

First, in a situation where one second hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result is stored, the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired, and three first hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result are stored. A case where the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (d), at the timing of t1, which is a situation in which game rounds are executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, FIG. As shown in 22 (e), the second reserved information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the number of reserved second reserved information is increased from one to two. In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information already stored is set to 480 seconds, which is the second adjustment total period, and the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time are set. The duration is set to 1 second, which is the first trigger adjustment period.

After that, when the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are completed, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 22 (d). In this case, the second adjustment total period has already been set as the continuation period of the game round for the second hold information that triggers the start of the game round. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 will continue over the second adjustment total period.

After that, at the timing of t3, the first reserved information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired as shown in FIG. 22 (b), and the number of reserved first reserved information is three as shown in FIG. 22 (c). Increases from to 4. In this case, each of the durations of the game times corresponding to each of the first reserved information already stored is set to 120 seconds, which is the result of dividing the third adjustment total period by "3", and is acquired this time. The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

After that, FIG. 22 (? As shown in a) and FIG. 22 (c), game rounds having a duration of 120 seconds are started, respectively. Further, at the timing of t7 in which the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b whose duration is set to the second adjustment total period are still continuing, FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (c) are shown. As shown, the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is started. This game round continues for 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

After that, at the timing of t8, which is a situation in which the game rounds triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high accuracy jackpot result continue, the accuracy is low as shown in FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (f). The game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is started. In this case, since the first hold information is treated as a loss result without executing the pass / fail determination process, the low probability jackpot result is invalidated.

Next, in a situation where three second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored, the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired, and the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are executed. The case where the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the first hold information is not obtained will be described.

As shown in FIG. 22 (d), at the timing of t9, which is the situation in which the game round is being executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, the second special figure corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result as shown in FIG. 22 (b). 1 Hold information is acquired. In this case, since the first hold information is not separately stored and the game round is not executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the first reserved information is displayed at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 22 (a). The game round is started with the first hold information corresponding to the acquired high-accuracy jackpot result as an opportunity. The duration of the game is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (d), at the timing of t10, which is a situation in which game rounds are executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. , The second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired as shown in FIG. 22 (e), and the number of holds of the second hold information increases from 3 to 4 as shown in FIG. 22 (f). .. In this case, each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the already stored second hold information is set to 160 seconds, which is the result of dividing the second adjustment total period by "3", and is acquired this time. The duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information is set to 1 second, which is the first trigger adjustment period.

After that, at the timing of t11, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13, which are the situations in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose duration is set to the third trigger adjustment period are continued, FIG. 22 ( As shown in d) and FIG. 22 (f), game rounds having a duration of 160 seconds are started, respectively. Further, at the timing of t14 in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose continuation period is set to the third trigger adjustment period are still continuing, FIGS. 22 (d) and 22 (f) are shown. As shown, the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is started. In this case, since the second hold information is treated as a loss result without executing the pass / fail determination process, the low probability jackpot result is invalidated. In addition, the game round continues for 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), at the timing of t15, which is the timing after the game round of the first trigger adjustment period in the second special figure display unit 37b is completed, as shown in FIG. 22 (a). 1 The game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the special figure display unit 37a ends. In this case, the open / close execution mode is started with the high accuracy jackpot result as a trigger.

Next, adjustment of the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. I will explain how to do it. 23 (a) to 23 (g) show that one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration of a game times in a case. Since the adjustment of the duration of the game times is executed in the high probability state and not in the normal game state, the following description will be given on the premise that the game state is in the high probability state.

As already explained, when one or more first hold information is acquired and the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired, the game corresponding to the already acquired first hold information. The total duration of the times is adjusted to be 360 seconds, which is the third total adjustment period. That is, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where three first hold information is acquired, the three already acquired information are acquired. Each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of is set to 120 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by the number of acquired first hold information "3". Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where two first hold information is acquired, the two already acquired information are acquired. Each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of the above is set to 180 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by "2" which is the number of the acquired first hold information. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), when one first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where one first hold information is acquired, one already acquired one. The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information of is set to 360 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by "1" which is the number of acquired first hold information. Further, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (g), the duration of the game round of the first reserved information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is set to 600 seconds, which is the third trigger adjustment period.

In addition, as already explained, when one or more second hold information is acquired and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly acquired, the second hold information already acquired is supported. The duration of each game is set to 1 second, which is the shortest adjustment period. Further, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (g), the duration of the game round of the second reserved information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is set to 250 seconds, which is the second trigger adjustment period.

By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired as the first hold information. In addition, when the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, the high-accuracy jackpot result is dealt with after the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is completed. It becomes easy to start the game round triggered by the first hold information. Specifically, if the duration of the game is not adjusted, the duration of the game that can be selected is 1 to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is 360 seconds, and the maximum time is 460 seconds. On the other hand, the minimum time required for the second special figure display unit 37b to start the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is 0 seconds, the maximum time is 103 seconds, and the second special figure display unit 37b. The duration of the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result on the figure display unit 37b is 250 seconds. In this case, the time required to start the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result on the first special figure display unit 37a is 360 seconds, which is the minimum time, and the high-accuracy jackpot result on the second special figure display unit 37b. Even if the time required to start the game round corresponding to is 103 seconds, which is the maximum time, the difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 257 seconds, which is longer than the first trigger adjustment period of 250 seconds. Is. Therefore, after the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the second special figure display unit 37b are completed, the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a are started, and both highs. The jackpot result is not invalidated.

As shown in FIG. 23 (d), when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the first hold information is not acquired, the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired. Before the hold information triggers the start of the game round, the first special figure display unit 37a cannot execute the game round over the third adjustment total period. In this situation, when the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, the game times and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result are obtained. In the situation where one of the triggered game times is being executed, the other will be executed, and the high-accuracy jackpot result of the side started later will be invalidated.

A state in which the high-accuracy jackpot result is not invalidated will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (f). FIG. 24 (a) shows the duration of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a, FIG. 24 (b) shows the acquisition timing of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result, and FIG. 24 (c) shows. Indicates the number of first reserved information stored on hold, FIG. 24 (d) shows the duration of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b, and FIG. 24 (e) corresponds to the low probability jackpot result. The acquisition timing of the second hold information is shown, and FIG. 24 (f) shows the number of the second hold information stored in the hold.

As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (d), the game is executed at both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b at the timing of t1. As shown in 24 (b), the first reserved information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the number of reserved first reserved information is increased from one to two. In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information already stored is set to 360 seconds, which is the third adjustment total period, and the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time are set. The duration is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

After that, when the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are completed, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 24 (a). In this case, the third adjustment total period has already been set as the continuation period of the game round for the first hold information that triggers the start of the game round. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 will continue over the third adjustment total period.

After that, at the timing of t3, the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired as shown in FIG. 24 (e), and the number of holds of the second hold information is three as shown in FIG. 24 (f). Increases from to 4. In this case, each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the already stored second hold information is set to 1 second, which is the shortest adjustment period, and the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time. The duration of is set to 250 seconds, which is the second trigger adjustment period.

After that, at the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6, which are the situations in which the game rotation in the first special figure display unit 37a whose duration is set to the third adjustment total period is continued, FIG. 24 ( As shown in d) and FIG. 24 (f), the game rounds having the shortest adjustment period are started. Further, at the timing of t7 in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose duration is set to the third adjustment total period are still continuing, FIGS. 24 (d) and 24 (f) are shown. As shown, the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is started. This game round continues for 250 seconds, which is the second trigger adjustment period.

After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 24D, the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the second special figure display unit 37b ends. However, at the timing of t8, since the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose duration is set to the third adjustment total period are still continuing, the opening / closing execution mode is not started and is waited, and t9. As shown in FIG. 24A at the timing, when the game round of the first special figure display unit 37a being executed ends, the open / close execution mode that has been waiting for the start is started.

After that, at the timing of t10, which is the timing after the opening / closing execution mode started at the timing of t9 ends, the first hold corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result as shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (c). The game round triggered by the information is started.

Next, a processing configuration that enables adjustment of the duration of the game times as described above will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the time of acquisition executed by the main MPU 82. The setting process at the time of acquisition is executed in step S505 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 12 (a)) and in step S605 in the second hold information acquisition process (FIG. 12 (b)). Is executed.

When the setting process at the time of this acquisition is executed with the acquisition of the first hold information as an opportunity (step S1301: YES), whether or not the acquired first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. Determine (step S1302). Specifically, among the first hold information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter is read out, and the numerical information is set in the high probability accuracy table which is the validity table referred to in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result. That is, the high probability accuracy table is referred to regardless of whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high probability state. As already explained, all the types of numerical information that give a big hit result in the low probability hit / fail table are included in the types of numerical information that give a big hit result in the high probability hit / fail table. In this case, by referring to the high probability hit / fail table in step S1302 and determining whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, the hold information acquired this time is in either the normal gaming state or the high probability state. It means that it is judged whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result.

When the acquired first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1302: YES), the first hold information acquired this time out of the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d of the first special figure hold area 125. "1" is set in the first jackpot hold flag provided in the area where is stored (step S1303). Here, the configurations of the first special figure holding area 125, the second special figure holding area 126, and the execution area 127 for the special figure will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 26A to 26D. .. FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first special drawing holding area 125, and FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the execution area 127a for the first special drawing. 26 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second special drawing holding area 126, and FIG. 26 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the execution area 127b for the second special drawing. It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125, the execution area 127a for the first special figure, and the second special figure holding area 126. In each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, the hit random number area in which the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is stored and the hit random number area acquired from the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type area where the numerical information is stored, the reach random number area where the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 is stored, and the duration period where the numerical information of the adjustment period set as the duration of the game times is stored. An area and a set flag that stores information indicating that an adjustment period is set as the duration of the game round are set. The hit random number area and the duration area each have a data amount of 2 bytes, the jackpot type area and the reach random number area each have a data amount of 1 byte, and the set flag has a data amount of 1 bit. In addition, each of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 stores information indicating that it corresponds to the holding information that results in a big hit in a high probability state. A flag is set, and information indicating that each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126 corresponds to the holding information that results in a big hit in a high probability state is stored. The second jackpot hold flag to be set is set. The first jackpot hold flag and the second jackpot hold flag are 1-bit data amounts.

When the first reserved information is newly acquired, the winning random number area in the area corresponding to the acquisition order of the first reserved information among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reserved area 125, Numerical information of counters C1 to C3 corresponding to each of the jackpot type area and the reach random number area is stored. Further, when the first hold information corresponds to the hold information that results in a big hit in a high probability state, the first hold of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure hold area 125 If the first jackpot hold flag in the area corresponding to the information acquisition order is set to "1" and the hold information that results in the jackpot is not supported in the high probability state, the first jackpot hold flag is "0". Is maintained at. In addition, when the first hold information corresponding to any of the jackpot results is acquired in the high probability state, the first hold of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure hold area 125 is obtained. Information on the adjustment period in the duration area of areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the acquisition order of information and the duration area of areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the first hold information acquired prior to the first hold information. Is stored, and "1" is set in the set flags of those areas 125a to 125d. Then, when the first hold information is the start target of the game round and the first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 is shifted, the hit random number area and the jackpot type area of the first area 125a are performed. , Each information stored in the reach random number area, the duration area, and the set flag is shifted to each corresponding area in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. Further, for the second area 125b to the fourth area 125d, each information stored in the hit random number area, the jackpot type area, the reach random number area, the duration area, the set flag, and the first jackpot hold flag in the n + 1 area is stored. It is shifted to each corresponding area in the nth area, and after the shift is completed, all the areas of the fourth area 125d are cleared to "0".

When the second reserved information is newly acquired, the winning random number area in the area corresponding to the acquisition order of the second reserved information among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reserved area 126, Numerical information of counters C1 to C3 corresponding to each of the jackpot type area and the reach random number area is stored. Further, when the second hold information corresponds to the hold information that results in a big hit in a high probability state, the second hold of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 If the second jackpot hold flag in the area corresponding to the information acquisition order is set to "1" and the hold information that results in the jackpot is not supported in the high probability state, the second jackpot hold flag is "0". Is maintained at. In addition, when the second hold information corresponding to any of the jackpot results is acquired in the high probability state, the second hold of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 is obtained. Information on the adjustment period in the duration area of areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the information acquisition order and the duration area of areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information. Is stored, and "1" is set in the set flags of those areas 126a to 126d. Then, when the second hold information becomes the start target of the game round and the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 is shifted, the hit random number area and the jackpot type area of the first area 126a are performed. , Each information stored in the reach random number area, the duration area, and the set flag is shifted to each corresponding area in the execution area 127b for the second special figure. Further, for the second area 126b to the fourth area 126d, each information stored in the hit random number area, the jackpot type area, the reach random number area, the duration area, the set flag, and the second jackpot hold flag in the n + 1 area is stored. It is shifted to each corresponding area in the nth area, and after the shift is completed, all the areas of the fourth area 126d are cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25), after executing the process of step S1303, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (step S1304). If it is not in the high probability state (step S1304: NO), the process for setting the duration of the game times to the adjustment period is not executed by ending the setting process at the time of the main acquisition as it is. That is, in the normal game state, the duration of the game times is not set as the adjustment period. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult for a situation in which the game times are executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b to occur, the duration of the game times is set to the adjustment period meaninglessly. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

When the current gaming state is a high-probability state (step S1304: YES), among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125, the first holding information acquired this time is preceded. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first jackpot hold flag of the areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the first hold information acquired in (step S1305). That is, it is determined whether or not the first hold information acquired earlier than the first hold information acquired this time is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the process for setting the duration of the game round to the adjustment period is not executed. As a result, when the first hold information that results in a big hit is already acquired in the high probability state, the adjustment period is not set as the continuation period of the game times for the first hold information. Is possible.

When a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined whether or not the number of first reserved information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is one (step S1306). When the first hold information is acquired in the situation where the game round is not executed in the first special figure display unit 37a and the first hold information is not stored in the first special figure hold area 125, and When the first hold information is acquired in the situation where the game round is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the first hold information is not stored in the first special figure hold area 125, the step An affirmative judgment is made in S1306. When a negative determination is made in step S1306, the front hold setting for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired earlier than the first hold information acquired this time as the adjustment period. The process is executed (step S1307). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, or when the process of step S1307 is executed, the corresponding hold setting for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time as the adjustment period. The process is executed (step S1308).

When the setting process at the time of this acquisition is executed with the acquisition of the second hold information as an opportunity (step S1301: NO), whether or not the acquired second hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. Determine (step S1309). Specifically, among the second hold information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter is read, and the numerical information is set in the high probability accuracy table, which is the validity table referred to in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result. That is, the high probability accuracy table is referred to regardless of whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high probability state. As already explained, all the types of numerical information that give a big hit result in the low probability hit / fail table are included in the types of numerical information that give a big hit result in the high probability hit / fail table. In this case, by referring to the high probability hit / fail table in step S1309 and determining whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, the hold information acquired this time is in either the normal gaming state or the high probability state. It means that it is judged whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result.

When the acquired second hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1309: YES), the second hold information acquired this time out of the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d of the second special figure hold area 126. Set "1" to the second jackpot hold flag provided in the area where is stored (step S1310). After executing the process of step S1310, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (step S1311). If it is not in the high probability state (step S1311: NO), the process for setting the duration of the game round to the adjustment period is not executed by ending the setting process at the time of the main acquisition as it is. That is, in the normal game state, the duration of the game times is not set as the adjustment period. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult for a situation in which the game times are executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b to occur, the duration of the game times is set to the adjustment period meaninglessly. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

When the current gaming state is a high-probability state (step S1311: YES), among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126, the second holding information acquired this time is preceded. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second jackpot hold flag of the areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the second hold information acquired in (step S1312). That is, it is determined whether or not the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the process for setting the duration of the game round to the adjustment period is not executed. As a result, when the second hold information that results in a big hit is already acquired in the high probability state, the adjustment period is not set as the continuation period of the game times corresponding to the second hold information. It becomes possible.

When a negative determination is made in step S1312, it is determined whether or not the number of second reserved information stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is one (step S1313). When the second hold information is acquired in the situation where the game round is not executed in the second special figure display unit 37b and the second hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 126, and When the second hold information is acquired in the situation where the game round is being executed on the second special figure display unit 37b and the second hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 126, the step An affirmative judgment is made in S1313. When a negative determination is made in step S1313, the front hold setting for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time as the adjustment period. The process is executed (step S1314). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1313, or when the process of step S1314 is executed, the corresponding hold setting for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time as the adjustment period. The process is executed (step S1315).

Next, the setting process of the front hold executed in step S1307 and step S1314 in the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information and is the hold information that results in a high probability jackpot in a high probability state (step S1401). Specifically, among the second hold information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read, and the numerical information is one of the numerical information of the high-accuracy jackpot result set in the distribution table. Determine if you are doing it. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the set processing for the shortest adjustment period is executed (step S1402). Specifically, among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126, the areas 126a to corresponding to the second holding information acquired earlier than the second holding information acquired this time. Numerical information of the shortest adjustment period is set in the duration area of 126d. After that, among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126, "1" is set to the set flag of the areas 126a to 126d in which the numerical information of the shortest adjustment period is set in the duration area (1). Step S1403).

If the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, or if it is the second hold information that does not result in a high probability jackpot in a high probability state (step S1401: NO), if the first hold information is acquired this time, that The number of the first hold information acquired before the first hold information and stored in the first special figure hold area 125 is grasped, and when the second hold information is acquired this time, the second hold information is used. Also grasps the number of second hold information acquired first and stored in the second special figure hold area 126 (step S1404). After that, the total adjustment period corresponding to the content of the hold information acquired this time is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, as in the process of step S1401, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is the hold information that results in a high probability jackpot in a high probability state, and the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information. And which of the second reserved information is determined. Then, in the case of the first hold information that results in a low probability jackpot in the high probability state, the numerical information of the first adjustment total period (specifically, 120 seconds) is read out, and the high probability jackpot result is obtained in the high probability state. If it is the first hold information, the numerical information of the third adjustment total period (specifically, 360 seconds) is read, and if it is the second hold information that results in a low probability jackpot in a high probability state, the second adjustment is made. The numerical information of the total period (specifically, 480 seconds) is read out.

After that, the period calculation process is executed (step S1406). Specifically, the numerical information of the total adjustment period read in step S1405 is divided by the number of pending information read in step S1404. In this case, each adjustment total period is set so that the result of the division is surely an integer. Then, the information of the adjustment period corresponding to the result of the period calculation process is set in the corresponding continuation period area of the first special figure holding area 125 or the second special figure holding area 126 (step S1407). For example, when the first hold information is newly acquired, the first hold acquired earlier than the first hold information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure hold area 125. The numerical information calculated in step S1406 is set in the duration area of the areas 125a to 125d where the information is stored. Further, for example, when the second reserved information is newly acquired, the second reserved information acquired earlier than the second reserved information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reserved area 126. 2. The numerical information calculated in step S1406 is set in the duration area of the areas 126a to 126d in which the hold information is stored. After that, numerical information of the adjustment period is input to the duration area of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 or the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126. “1” is set in the set flags of the set areas 125a to 125d and 126a to 126d (step S1408).

Next, the corresponding hold setting process executed in step S1308 and step S1315 in the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

First, it is determined whether or not the first hold information or the second hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a high probability jackpot in a high probability state (step S1501). Specifically, among the first hold information or the second hold information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read, and the numerical information is the numerical value of the high-accuracy jackpot result set in the distribution table. Determine if it matches any of the information.

When the hold information acquired this time is the hold information that results in a high probability jackpot in the high probability state and is the first hold information (step S1501 and step S1502: YES), the first setting process is executed (step S1503). In the first setting process, of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125, the third opportunity adjustment period is set in the continuation period area of the areas 125a to 125d in which the first holding information acquired this time is stored. Set the numerical information (specifically, 600 seconds).

When the hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a high probability jackpot in a high probability state and is the second hold information (step S1501: YES, step S1502: NO), the second setting process is executed (step S1504). ). In the second setting process, of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126, the second trigger adjustment period is set in the continuation period area of the areas 126a to 126d in which the second holding information acquired this time is stored. Set the numerical information (specifically, 250 seconds).

When the hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a low probability jackpot in a high probability state (step S1504: NO), the third setting process is executed (step S1505). In the third setting process, if the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, the area in which the first hold information acquired this time is stored among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure hold area 125. Numerical information of the first trigger adjustment period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the duration area of 125a to 125d, and if the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information, the second special figure hold area 126 Of the 1st to 4th areas 126a to 126d, the numerical information of the first trigger adjustment period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the continuation period area of the areas 126a to 126d in which the second reserved information acquired this time is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S1503 to S1505, the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 or the first to fourth areas 126a to the second special figure holding area 126 Of the 126d, "1" is set in the set flags of the areas 125a to 125d and 126a to 126d in which the numerical information of the adjustment period is set in the duration area (step S1506).

When the above processing is executed, the duration of the game round is set to the adjustment period. When the hold information for which the adjustment period is set becomes the start target of the game round, the process of step S806 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S801 of the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 14). In step S806, if the game number to be started this time is the first special figure display unit 37a, the numerical information stored in the duration area of the execution area 127a for the first special figure is read and read out. The numerical information obtained by subtracting the numerical information corresponding to the final stop period from the numerical information is specified as the variable display period of the current game times. Then, the numerical information of the specified fluctuation display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter corresponding to the first special figure display unit 37a (step S805). Further, in step S806, if the game number to be started this time is the second special figure display unit 37b, the numerical information stored in the duration area of the execution area 127b for the second special figure is read out and the numerical information is read out. The numerical information obtained by subtracting the numerical information corresponding to the final stop period from the read numerical information is specified as the variable display period of the current game times. Then, the numerical information of the specified fluctuation display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b (step S805). As a result, the adjustment period is set as the duration of the game.

Further, when the adjustment period is set as the continuation period of the game times, the sound light side MPU 93 executes the adjustment variation table reading process corresponding to the adjustment period in the table setting process (FIG. 16) (step). S1007). The adjustment variation table is stored in advance in the sound / light side ROM 94 corresponding to each of the adjustment periods that can be set. When the effect for game rounds is executed according to the adjustment variation table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the deviation result, the reach effect does not occur. On the other hand, when the effect for game rounds is executed according to the adjustment variation table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the jackpot result, the reach effect occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a reach effect may be generated even when the effect for game rounds is executed according to the adjustment variation table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the deviation result. .. Further, in the production for the game round corresponding to the adjustment period, the production may be executed so that the player can recognize that it is the adjustment period, and the production for the game round corresponding to the adjustment period may be executed. In the production, the production may not be executed so that the player can recognize that it is the adjustment period.

When the hold information for which the adjustment period is set becomes the start target of the game round, the set adjustment period is set as the duration of the game round, but the adjustment period is set. If the open / close execution mode triggered by other hold information is started in the situation where the hold information is present, all the adjustment periods set at that time are deleted. Specifically, in the special figure determination process (FIG. 18), the process of step S1207 is executed as a part of the process for starting the open / close execution mode. In step S1207, all the duration areas and set flags in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 and the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126 are set to ". Clear "0". As a result, for example, in the situation where the hold information for which the adjustment period is set exists, the open / close execution mode triggered by the other hold information is executed, and the game state is in a high probability state after the end of the open / close execution mode. It is possible to prevent the adjustment period from being set as the continuation period of the game times in the normal game state after the transition from the normal game state to the normal game state.

The clear process corresponding to step S1207 may be executed before the first game round is started after the open / close execution mode ends. For example, the clear process corresponding to step S1207 is executed during the open / close execution mode. The clear process corresponding to step S1207 may be executed at the end of the open / close execution mode. Further, when the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode becomes a high probability state, the clearing process corresponding to step S1207 may not be executed.

In step S1302 and step S1309 in the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25), regardless of whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high probability state, the newly acquired hold information is the jackpot result in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not the pending information is, and if the pending information is a jackpot result in a high probability state, "1" is set in the jackpot holding flag corresponding to the pending information (step S1303, step). S1310). As a result, it is possible to prevent the adjustment period corresponding to the first to third adjustment total periods from being set for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game times. In this case, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the relationship of the execution timing of each game round triggered by each of these hold information is predetermined. It becomes the relationship of. As a result, each of the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result will be generated according to a certain rule, and each game time It is possible to make the relative execution timing preferable.

The relative execution timing of each game is adjusted as described above by adjusting the duration of the game. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above only by adjusting the duration of the game.

The game is triggered by the first hold information that starts before the first hold information that corresponds to the jackpot result, and the second hold information that starts before the second hold information that corresponds to the jackpot result. By adjusting the duration of at least one of the game times, the game time triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result were triggered. The relationship between the execution timing and the game times is set to a predetermined relationship. This makes it possible to facilitate the relationship between the execution timings of these game times to become a predetermined relationship.

When the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is already acquired in the situation where the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, or when the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is already acquired. When the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the adjustment of the duration of the game times as described above is not executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while not affecting the execution timing of other pending information corresponding to the jackpot result.

Corresponds to the game times and the jackpot result triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result according to at least one type of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. The relationship between the execution timing and the game times triggered by the second hold information is changed. This makes it possible to make the relative execution timing of each game time preferable according to the type of the reserved information.

Of the first hold information and the second hold information, in a situation where the game is executed with the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result as the hold information of one of the first hold information and the second hold information. When the game round triggered by the other hold information is started, the other hold information is not treated as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start condition of the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result from being satisfied even though the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result has already been executed.

In this case, when the first hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponds to the low-accuracy jackpot result, the game triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result. The execution timing of these game rounds is adjusted so that the game rounds can be started triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result in the situation where the rounds are being executed. As a result, the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result having a relatively high advantage is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result having a relatively low advantage. It is possible to invalidate the game times that have been played.

In addition, when the first hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, the game round is executed with one of the hold information as an opportunity. The execution timing of these game rounds is adjusted so that the game rounds triggered by the other are not started. As a result, the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result with a relatively high advantage and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result with a relatively high advantage are used as an opportunity. It is possible to prevent one of the game times from being invalidated by the other.

Based on the acquisition of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the duration of the game round triggered by the first hold information was adjusted, and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result was acquired. Based on this, the duration of the game round is adjusted based on the second hold information. As a result, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is compared with the configuration in which only the duration of one of the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information is adjusted. It becomes easy to make adjustments so that the relationship between the execution timings of the game times triggered by the above and the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result becomes a predetermined relationship.

Based on the acquisition of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the duration of the game round triggered by the first hold information is set in a predetermined manner regardless of whether or not the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired. Based on the adjustment and the acquisition of the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the duration of the game round triggered by the second hold information is determined regardless of whether or not the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired. It is adjusted in the manner of. This makes it possible to simplify the process for specifying the execution trigger of each adjustment.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described first embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the first embodiment.

-When the hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is acquired as the hold information of one of the first hold information and the second hold information, and the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is acquired as the other hold information. , If the hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is the hold information that results in the high-probability jackpot result in both the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result among these hold information The duration of the game round may be adjusted so that the game round for which the hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is executed is started after the game round for which is the execution target is completed. This makes it possible to continue the high-probability mode while increasing the number of times the jackpot result occurs as much as possible.

-Adjust the relationship between the execution timings of the game times for which the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is executed and the game times for which the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is executed is set to a predetermined relationship. The target is not limited to the duration of the game, and in addition to or in place of the duration of the game, for example, the period from the end of one game to the start of the next. It may be a configuration to be adjusted. For example, even if the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a are completed in a situation where the first hold information is stored on hold, until the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a are newly started. The start waiting period may be longer than the normal period, or a plurality of types of the start waiting period may be set and the start waiting period selected according to the type of the event to be adjusted may be different. .. Further, for example, even if the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are completed in the situation where the second hold information is stored in hold, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are newly started. The start waiting period up to is may be longer than the normal period, and a plurality of types of the start waiting period are set and the start waiting period selected according to the type of the event to be adjusted is different. May be good. By adjusting the start waiting period in addition to the duration of the game times, the types of elements to be adjusted increase, so that it becomes easy to make adjustments so that the relationship between the execution timings of each game times becomes a predetermined relationship. In addition, by adjusting the start waiting period instead of the duration of the game, it is possible to make the relationship of the execution timing of each game a predetermined relationship while not affecting the duration of the game. Become.

-The hold information of the adjustment opportunity, which is one of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result, the first hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result, and the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result, has been acquired. In this case, the duration of each pre-execution target game so that the total period of the pre-execution target game times executed before the start of the game with the hold information of the adjustment trigger is the predetermined period. Is set to the same period, but it is not limited to this, and although the duration of the game times of the first execution target is different, the total period of the game times of these first execution targets is the predetermined period. The configuration may be adjusted so as to be. The configuration for making the duration of the game times of the prior execution target different is arbitrary. For example, while setting the total period of the game times of the prior execution target to be a predetermined period, each game time is within that range. The continuation period may be determined by lottery, or the duration of each game may be predetermined in relation to the number of game times to be executed first and the predetermined period. As a result, even when the duration of the game is adjusted, it is possible to diversify the setting mode of the duration of each game.

-If the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the game times are being executed by the first special figure display unit 37a, the game of the first special figure display unit 37a being executed at that time is acquired. The duration of the game may be adjusted in consideration of the remaining period of the game. In addition, when the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the game round is being executed by the second special figure display unit 37b, the second special figure display unit 37b being executed at that time The duration of the game may be adjusted in consideration of the remaining period of the game. For example, if the remaining period of the game times currently being executed is relatively long, the period required for the reserved information corresponding to the jackpot result to start the game times to be executed is relatively shortened. If the remaining period of the currently executed game is relatively short, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result will be used as a configuration to relatively lengthen the period required for the game to be executed. May be good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period required for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result from starting the game round to be executed to become longer than necessary.

-The reach effect may be generated in the game times that are started earlier than the game times corresponding to the jackpot result and the duration of the game times is adjusted. It may be configured. Further, when the reach effect occurs, the effect corresponding to the game time for which the duration of the game time is adjusted may be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot result occurs in the game times after the game times in which the reach effect is executed through the contents of the reach effect.

-Of the first hold information and the second hold information, the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target and the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target are executed in duplicate. If the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends first, the open / close execution mode starts until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target ends. Is not limited to the configuration in which is delayed, and at the timing when the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends, the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target are executed. It may be configured to forcibly terminate and immediately start the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from becoming long.

In addition, at the timing when the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends, the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target are temporarily stopped, and then the open / close execution mode ends. After that, the once-stopped game times may be restarted, or the temporarily stopped game times may be restarted from the beginning. In the configuration in which the once stopped game times are restarted from the beginning, the hit / fail judgment process for the hold information that triggered the start of the game times may be newly executed, and the hit / fail judgment process in the temporarily stopped game times may be performed. The configuration may be such that the result is inherited.

-When a game round in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is executed and a game round in which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is the execution target is started, the game round on the different side The hold information is not limited to the configuration that is treated as a result of deviation regardless of its contents, and although the hold information on the different side is the execution target of the pass / fail judgment process, the hold information on the different side is the execution target. When the game round is completed, it may be treated as a loss result regardless of the execution result of the win / fail determination process.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the setting mode of the adjustment period is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the time of acquisition in the present embodiment.

When the hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a high probability jackpot in a high probability state (step S1601: YES), it has a high probability as hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not there is pending information that results in a low probability jackpot in the state (step S1602). Specifically, when the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 has a low probability jackpot result in a high probability state. 2 It is determined whether or not the reserved information exists, and if the reserved information acquired this time is the second reserved information, there is a high probability that the first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 125 will be included. It is determined whether or not the first hold information that results in a low probability jackpot exists in the state. In this determination, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the pending information to be determined, and the numerical information matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high probability accuracy table. Judge whether or not. Then, when it corresponds to the jackpot result, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the pending information to be determined, and the numerical information is set in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it matches with any of the numerical information of.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a high probability jackpot in both the normal gaming state and the high probability state (step S1603). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the numerical information group of the hit random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the normal gaming state is included in the numerical information group of the hit random number counter C1 which is the jackpot result in the high probability state. It has been. Therefore, in step S1603, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the pending information acquired this time, and the numerical information matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the low probability / rejection table. Judge whether or not.

If the hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a big hit in both the normal game state and the high probability state, it is low triggered by the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are different from the hold information acquired this time. It is advantageous for the player to start the game round of the high probability jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time after the game round of the probability jackpot result is completed. On the other hand, if the hold information acquired this time is a hold information that will result in a big hit if it is in a high probability state, a low probability big hit triggered by the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time. It is advantageous for the player to start the resulting game round in a situation where the high-probability jackpot result game round triggered by the hold information acquired this time is executed to invalidate the low-probability jackpot result.

Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S1603, the first adjustment process is executed (step S1605) on condition that the adjustment is possible (step S1604: YES). In the first adjustment process, in the situation where the game round of the high-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time is executed, the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time is displayed. Each of the reserved information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 and the second special figure holding area 126 is adjusted as the duration of the game times so that the game round of the low probability jackpot result triggered by the trigger is started. Set the period of use. However, the hold information that is different from the hold information acquired this time and corresponds to the low-accuracy jackpot result on the special figure display units 37a and 37b is the next trigger for the start of the game on the different special figure display units 37a and 37b. In the case of the pending information, the current game times are not executed on the different special figure display units 37a, 37b, or the current game times are executed on the different special figure display units 37a, 37b. Even if this is the case, if the end timing of the game round is earlier than the end timing of the game round currently being executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information acquired this time. , It is not possible to set the adjustment period so that the above-mentioned event occurs. In such a case, the first adjustment process is not executed by making a negative determination in step S1604.

When a negative determination is made in step S1602, it is determined whether or not there is hold information that results in a high probability jackpot in a high probability state as hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are different from the hold information acquired this time. Determine (step S1606). Specifically, when the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, a high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 in a high probability state. 2 It is determined whether or not the reserved information exists, and if the reserved information acquired this time is the second reserved information, there is a high probability that the first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 125 will be included. It is determined whether or not the first hold information that results in a high probability jackpot exists in the state. In this determination, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the pending information to be determined, and the numerical information matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high probability accuracy table. Judge whether or not. Then, when the jackpot result is supported, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the pending information to be determined, and the numerical information is set in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it matches with any of the numerical information of.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1603 or the affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the second adjustment process is executed on condition that the adjustment is possible (step S1607: YES) (step S1608). In the second adjustment process when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1603, after the game round of the low-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time is completed. , About each of the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 and the second special figure hold area 126 so that the game round of the high accuracy jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time is started. If it is possible to set an adjustment period as the duration of the game, such an adjustment period is set. In this case, for example, the game times are executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, and the special figure display corresponding to the hold information acquired this time among these game times is displayed. The end timing on the side of units 37a and 37b is later than the end timing on the side of the special figure display unit 37a and 37b that is different from the hold information acquired this time, and the special figure display unit corresponding to the hold information acquired this time. On the 37a, 37b side, the next game is on the special figure display unit 37a, 37b side, which is the hold information that triggers the start of the game round, and the hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is different from the hold information acquired this time. In the case of the hold information that triggers the start of the round, the duration of the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to this low probability jackpot result is set, and the end timing of the game round corresponds to the hold information acquired this time. It is set to be before the end timing of the current game round on the figure display units 37a and 37b.

Further, in the second adjustment process when the affirmative determination is made in step S1603, for example, the hold information is acquired before the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information acquired this time. Instead, the game times corresponding to the hold information acquired this time are prior to the game times triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low-accuracy jackpot result on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are different from the hold information acquired this time. If there is no choice but to start, the game times will be started with the hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result in the situation where the game times corresponding to the hold information acquired this time are being executed. The adjustment period is set as the continuation period of the game times for each of the reserved information stored in the special figure holding area 125 and the second special drawing holding area 126.

In the second adjustment process when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1606, the game times of the high-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are different from the hold information acquired this time, and the acquisition this time. The first special figure holding area 125 and the second special figure holding area 126 so that one of the game times of the high-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the held information is completed and then the other game time is started. An adjustment period is set as the duration of the game round for each of the reserved information stored in.

However, in a situation where the game times are not executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result Cannot be set for the adjustment period so that the above-mentioned event occurs when is acquired at the same time. In such a case, the second adjustment process is not executed by making a negative determination in step S1607.

When the hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a low probability jackpot in a high probability state (step S1601: NO), it has a high probability as hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not there is pending information that results in a high probability jackpot in the state (step S1610). Specifically, when the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, a high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 in a high probability state. 2 It is determined whether or not the reserved information exists, and if the reserved information acquired this time is the second reserved information, there is a high probability that the first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 125 will be included. It is determined whether or not the first hold information that results in a high probability jackpot exists in the state. In this determination, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the pending information to be determined, and the numerical information matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high probability accuracy table. Judge whether or not. Then, when the jackpot result is supported, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the pending information to be determined, and the numerical information is set in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it matches with any of the numerical information of.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1610, it is determined whether or not the hold information that results in the high probability jackpot is the hold information that results in the high probability jackpot in both the normal gaming state and the high probability state ( Step S1611).

If the hold information that results in a high-probability jackpot is the hold information that results in a jackpot in either the normal game state or the high-probability state, after the game round of the low-probability jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time is completed, It is advantageous for the player to start the game round with a high probability jackpot result. On the other hand, if the hold information that is the high-probability jackpot result is the hold information that will be the jackpot result if it is in the high-probability state, the game times of the low-probability jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time are the high-probability jackpot results. It is advantageous for the player to start the game in a situation where the game is being executed and invalidate the low probability jackpot result.

Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S1611, the third adjustment process is executed on condition that the adjustment is possible (step S1612: YES) (step S1613). In the third adjustment process, the low-accuracy jackpot triggered by the pending information acquired this time is executed in the situation where the game times of the high-accuracy jackpot result are executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are different from the reserved information acquired this time. An adjustment period is set as the duration of the game round for each of the reserved information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 and the second special figure holding area 126 so that the resulting game round is started. However, this is the case where the hold information corresponding to the low-accuracy jackpot result acquired this time is the hold information that will trigger the start of the next game on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information. When the current game times are not executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information, or when the current game times are executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information. Even if there is, if the end timing of the game round is earlier than the end timing of the game round currently being executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b side different from the hold information acquired this time, as described above. It is not possible to set the adjustment period so that the event will occur. In such a case, the third adjustment process is not executed by making a negative determination in step S1612.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1611, the fourth adjustment process is executed (step S1615) on condition that the adjustment is possible (step S1614: YES). In the fourth adjustment process, after the game round of the low-accuracy jackpot result corresponding to the hold information acquired this time is completed, it corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time. It is possible to set an adjustment period as the duration of the game round for each of the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 and the second special figure hold area 126 so that the game round is started. In such a situation, such an adjustment period is set.

Further, in the fourth adjustment process, for example, the hold information that triggers the start of the game is acquired on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are different from the hold information acquired this time, before the hold information corresponding to the high accuracy jackpot result. It has not been done, and the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result must be started before the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result acquired this time. If not, the first special figure reservation area is so that the game round corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is started in the situation where the game round corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is started. An adjustment period is set as the duration of the game times for each of the reserved information stored in 125 and the second special figure holding area 126.

However, in a situation where the game times are not executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result Cannot be set for the adjustment period so that the above-mentioned event occurs when is acquired at the same time. In such a case, the fourth adjustment process is not executed by making a negative determination in step S1614.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in one of the first hold information and the second hold information, the adjustment of the duration of the game is not executed, but the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. The adjustment of the duration of the game is executed on condition that both the player and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are acquired. As a result, it is possible to prevent the adjustment of the duration of the game from being executed in a situation where it is not necessary to adjust the duration of the game.

Even in a situation where the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are acquired, the execution timing of each game time corresponding to these jackpot results cannot be set as a predetermined timing. If the situation is the case, no adjustment of the duration of the game is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the adjustment of the duration of the game from being executed in a situation where it is not necessary to adjust the duration of the game.

Even if the hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired as one of the first hold information and the second hold information and the hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is acquired as the other, the high probability is high. If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the hold information that will result in a jackpot in either the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the high probability jackpot result will be obtained after the game times corresponding to the low probability jackpot result are completed. The duration of the game round is adjusted so that the game round corresponding to is started. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot result occurs while maintaining the high probability mode.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
It should be noted that the content is not limited to the description of the second embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. By the way, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the second embodiment.

-In the situation where the game times corresponding to the low probability jackpot result are being executed, the hold information that is the jackpot result even in the low probability mode is acquired as the hold information on the side different from the hold information that is the execution target of the game times. In this case, the low probability is such that the game round triggered by the hold information that is the jackpot result even in the low probability mode is started after the game round corresponding to the currently executed low probability jackpot result is completed. Even in the mode, the period required until the game round is started triggered by the hold information that results in a big hit may be adjusted. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which jackpot results occur.

-When the hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired as the hold information on the side different from the hold information on which the game round is executed in the situation where the game round corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is executed. The low is such that the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is started in the situation where the game round corresponding to the high probability jackpot result currently being executed is being executed. The period required until the game round is started triggered by the hold information corresponding to the probability jackpot result may be adjusted. This makes it possible to facilitate the high probability mode to continue for a long time.

-Of the first hold information and the second hold information, the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target and the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target are executed in duplicate. If the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends first, the open / close execution mode starts until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target ends. Is not limited to the configuration in which is delayed, and at the timing when the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends, the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target are executed. It may be configured to forcibly terminate and immediately start the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from becoming long.

-When a game round in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is executed and a game round in which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is the execution target is started, the game round on the different side The hold information is not limited to the configuration that is treated as a result of deviation regardless of its contents, and although the hold information on the different side is the execution target of the pass / fail judgment process, the hold information on the different side is the execution target. When the game round is completed, it may be treated as a loss result regardless of the execution result of the win / fail determination process.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA11 which is an region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PA11 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and above the variable display unit 36. The left region PA12, which is the left region, the right region PA13, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PA11, and the left region PA12 and the right region PA13, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided into a lower region PA14 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the launch operation device 28 as the first launch operation with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, the game ball is moved to the left of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA11. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA11 → the left side region PA12 → the lower region PA14. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the upper region PA11 is on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA11 → the right region PA13 → the lower region PA14. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA12 of the left side area PA12 and the right side area PA13, and the right side area. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA13. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum momentum, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA11 → the right region PA13 → the lower region PA14.

The lower region PA 14 is provided with a first operating port 33 as in the first embodiment. However, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment are not provided. Instead, in the present embodiment, the first special ball entry device 131, the second special ball entry device 132, the first through gate 133, and the second through gate 134 are provided. The first special ball entry device 131, the second special ball entry device 132, the first through gate 133, and the second through gate 134 are provided in the right area PA 13 of the game area PA. In addition, a special electric winning device 32 is also provided in the right area PA13. In this case, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA12 can win a prize in the first operating port 33, and the first special ball entry device 131, the second special ball entry device 132, the first through gate 133, and the second It is not possible to win a prize in the through gate 134 and the special electric winning device 32. The game ball flowing down the right area PA13 can win a prize in the first special ball entry device 131, the second special ball entry device 132, the first through gate 133, the second through gate 134, and the special electric winning device 32. It is not possible to win a prize in the first operating port 33. The number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first special ball entry device 131 is one, and one game ball enters the second special ball entry device 132. The number of game balls paid out in some cases is also one. However, the number of these payouts may be different.

The configuration of the first special ball entry device 131 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (a). The configuration of the second special ball entry device 132 is the same as the configuration of the first special ball entry device 131. FIG. 31A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special ball entry device 131 in the non-accepting state. The first special ball entry device 131 discharges the base unit 141 in which the discharge passage 143 for discharging the game balls flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 and the game balls flowing down the game area PA are discharged. It is provided with a guidance unit 142 for guiding to the passage 143. The entrance portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 has an opening area of one game ball or more, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 131a is provided on the outlet portion 143b side of the discharge passage 143, and the detection sensor 131a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first special ball entry device 131.

The guidance unit 142 receives the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 143a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 143 and the guide member 144 into the discharge passage 143. The guide drive unit 145 for displacing between the initial position at which the game ball cannot be guided and the guidance position at which the guidance is possible, and the discharge passage 143 in the situation where the guide member 144 is arranged at the initial position. With the blocking member 146 arranged at the blocking position that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 143 and not blocking the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 143 in the situation where the guide member 144 is arranged at the guiding position. , Is equipped. The guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction so that the guide member 144 faces downward. A transmission unit 147 is provided on the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 145.

When the guide driving unit 145 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 144 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 146 is arranged at the blocking position by the urging force of the urging means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 143 and do not project into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front region of the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 143 by the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146, that is, the game ball is the first. The game area PA flows downward without entering the special ball entry device 131. Further, since the blocking member 146 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantially opening area of the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 is less than one game ball. As a result, in the situation where the guide member 144 is arranged at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the first special ball entry device 131.

When the guide driving unit 145 is in the driving state, the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, the guide member 144 is arranged at the guiding position, and the blocking member 146 is not. It is placed in the blocking position. FIG. 31B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special ball entry device 131 in the guided state.

When the guide member 144 is arranged at the guide position, the tip end side of the guide member 144 projects from the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 toward the game area PA side. This amount of protrusion is such that the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 143a in the game region PA can be received from below. Since the upper surface of the tip side of the guide member 144 is inclined downward toward the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143, the game ball received from below on the tip side of the guide member 144 is the upper surface of the guide member 144. Will be guided into the discharge passage 143. Further, when the blocking member 146 is arranged in the non-blocking position, the blocking member 146 is displaced so that the tip portion thereof is located above the blocking position, so that the game of rolling on the upper surface of the guide member 144 The ball flows into the discharge passage 143 without interfering with the blocking member 146. As a result, the guide drive unit 145 is put into the drive state, so that the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 143a in the game area PA enters the first special ball entry device 131. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the guide driving unit 145 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 144 is arranged in the initial position, and the blocking member 146 is arranged in the blocking position is referred to as a closed state of the first special ball entry device 131. The state in which the guide driving unit 145 is in the driving state, the guide member 144 is arranged in the guiding position, and the blocking member 146 is arranged in the non-blocking position is referred to as an open state of the first special ball entry device 131.

The first special ball entry device 131 includes a cover member 148 provided so as to face the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 148 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 148a in the front region of the entrance portion 143a in the game region PA, and 1 is a game ball that simultaneously passes through the front region of the entrance portion 143a. It is provided so as to limit the number of the game balls to one and to regulate the forward movement and the lateral movement of the pachinko machine 10 of the game ball. As a result, when the guidance unit 142 of the first special ball entry device 131 is in the guided state, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls are simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 143 of the first special ball entry device 131. At the same time, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front region of the entrance portion 143a into the discharge passage 143 in the guidance state.

The first special ball entry device 131 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the first through gate 133, and the second special ball entry device 132 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the second through gate 134. Can be switched to. Specifically, when a prize is won in the first through gate 133, the hold information on the first general drawing side is acquired up to the upper limit of the number of stored numbers (specifically, four). When the reserved information on the first normal drawing side is stored, an internal lottery is performed, and the first normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 135. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is won, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variation display is completed, the first special ball entry device 131 is opened in a predetermined mode. The first normal figure hold display unit 136 is provided at a position adjacent to the first normal figure display unit 135, and the number of hold information on the first normal figure side is obtained by lighting the first normal figure hold display unit 136. Is displayed. Further, when the second through gate 134 is won, the reserved information on the second normal drawing side is acquired up to the upper limit storage number (specifically, four). When the reserved information on the second normal drawing side is stored, an internal lottery is performed, and the second normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 137. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is won, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variation display is completed, the second special ball entry device 132 is opened in a predetermined mode. A second normal figure hold display unit 138 is provided at a position adjacent to the second normal figure display unit 137, and the number of reserved information on the second normal figure side is increased by lighting the second normal figure hold display unit 138. Is displayed.

In the right region PA13, a second through gate 134 is provided below the first through gate 133, and a first special ball entry device 131 is provided below the second through gate 134, and the first special entry device 131 is provided. A second special ball entry device 132 is provided below the ball device 131, and a special electric winning device 32 is provided below the second special ball entry device 132. In the first through gate 133, the second through gate 134, the first special ball entry device 131, and the second special ball entry device 132, the center in the horizontal direction at each entrance of the game ball is on the same straight line in the vertical direction. Is located in. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 133 in the vertical direction surely passes through the second through gate 134, and the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 134 is opened by the first special ball entry device 131. If it is in the state, the first special ball entry device 131 is surely won regardless of the state of the second special ball entry device 132, and the first special ball entry device 131 is in the closed state and the second special ball entry device 132. If is in the open state, the second special ball-entry device 132 is surely won, and if both the first special ball-entry device 131 and the second special ball-entry device 132 are in the closed state, the special electric winning device 32 is directed. Plumb bob.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the first special ball entry device 131, the first hold information is acquired, and when a prize is generated in the second special ball entry device 132, the second hold information is obtained. Is obtained. In this case, when the game state is the normal game state and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is difficult for both the first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 to be opened, and the game state. When is in the high probability state and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, both the first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 are likely to be in the open state. Further, when both the first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 are won in the open state in the high probability state, the period during which the first special ball entry device 131 is in the open state and the second The period in which the special ball entry device 132 is in the open state is adjusted so as to be different from the period in which the special ball entry device 132 is in the open state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it possible to easily acquire both the first hold information and the second hold information in the high probability state.

The first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 are not limited to the configuration in which they are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and the first special ball entry device 131 is provided according to the same launch operation mode. Although it is possible to aim for a prize in the second special ball-entry device 132 and a prize in the second special ball-entry device 132, the position relationship between the first special ball-entry device 131 and the second special ball-entry device 132 is shifted in the lateral direction. It may be the configuration provided in. In this case, it is not necessary to adjust the period in which the first special ball entry device 131 is in the open state and the period in which the second special ball entry device 132 is in the open state in a high probability state. However, it is possible to configure the configuration so that both the first hold information and the second hold information can be easily acquired in the high probability state.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the playability and the configuration using the look-ahead result are different from those in the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the contents of the pass / fail table in this embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d).

As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), a big hit result, a small hit result, and a missed result are set as the hit / miss result in the hit / miss table. Similar to the first embodiment, the jackpot result is a winning / failing result that can trigger a transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also trigger a transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a win / fail result that does not trigger a shift in both the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode, while it triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The deviation result is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As described above, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode regardless of whether the big hit result is obtained or the small hit result is obtained. However, the open / close execution mode executed when the big hit result is obtained and the small hit execution mode are used. The opening / closing mode of the special electric winning device 32 is different from that of the opening / closing execution mode executed when a hit result is obtained. Specifically, the open / close execution mode executed when a big hit result is obtained is a round number-specified mode executed up to a predetermined number of round games as in the first embodiment. As already explained, the round game is until a predetermined opening duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. It is a game that continues. In this case, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In, the opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, since the open duration of the round game is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, the upper limit is set to the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. It can be expected that more than the number of game balls will win. Further, the number of round games executed in the round number specified mode is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

In the open / close execution mode executed when a small hit result is obtained, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls is set. It is an open / close number regulation mode that ends when either of the conditions of winning the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. The opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close number regulation mode is longer than the firing cycle of the game balls (specifically, 0.6 seconds), and the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number (specifically, 10). It is set to a period for specifying the number of openings and closings, which is shorter than the product of. In the pachinko machine 10, since the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is set to one, the opening continuation period of one time is set to the opening / closing number regulation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing number specification mode is set to a plurality of times, the total period of the opening / closing continuation period of the plurality of times is specified as the above opening / closing number. The configuration may be set to the usage period. Specifically, the opening / closing number regulation period is set to 1.8 seconds. In the open / close execution mode executed when a small hit result is obtained, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player, although the number is smaller than the open / close execution mode executed when a big hit result is obtained.

As the pass / fail table, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), the first special figure used for determining the pass / fail of the first hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. A pass / fail table for the second special figure and a pass / fail table for the second special figure used for determining the pass / fail of the second hold information stored in the execution area 127b for the second special figure are set. Further, the pass / fail table for the first special figure has a low accuracy table and a high accuracy table, and similarly, the pass / fail table for the second special figure also has a low accuracy table and a high accuracy table. There is a pass / fail table. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, different winning / failing tables are referred to in the first holding information and the second holding information, and in any case, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are used as the winning / losing lottery mode in the winning / failing determination. Existing.

Explaining each hit / fail table in detail, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the low probability / hit / fail table for the first special figure has two random numbers (for example, “5” and “305”) that result in a big hit. "), And other than that, it is a random number value that results in a deviation. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the first reserved information, it may be either a big hit result or a missed result, but it is not a small hit result.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the number of random numbers resulting in the jackpot is set in the high probability / failure table for the first special figure more than in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure. There are 20 pieces (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305". , "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. The values of other random numbers are the values of random numbers that result in deviation. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the first reserved information, either the jackpot result or the missed result is obtained, but the small hit result is not obtained.

As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the values of random numbers other than the random numbers that result in the big hit are the values of the random numbers that result in the small hit. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the winning / failing determination process is performed on the second reserved information, either the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained. However, as will be described in detail later, there may be a situation in which the second hold information triggers the start of the game, but the hit / fail determination process is not executed for the second hold information. In this situation, the second hold is performed. Information is treated as an outlier result.

As shown in FIG. 32 (d), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as that of the high accuracy table for the first special figure in the high accuracy table for the second special figure. Therefore, the number of random numbers that result in the jackpot is larger than that in the case of the low probability / rejection table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the values of random numbers other than the random numbers that result in the big hit are the values of the random numbers that result in the small hit. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the second reserved information, either the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained. However, as will be described in detail later, there may be a situation in which the second hold information triggers the start of the game, but the hit / fail determination process is not executed for the second hold information. In this situation, the second hold is performed. Information is treated as an outlier result.

As described above, when the second hold information triggers a hit / fail judgment, a small hit result can be generated, and a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 to correspond to the small hit result. The open / close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, the player can slightly increase the number of balls held by the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and values of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result is obtained. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

In the configuration in which the contents of the pass / fail table are different between the first hold information and the second hold information as described above, the contents of the distribution table are the first hold information and the second hold as in the first embodiment. It is the same as the information. Further, in the first embodiment, there are two types of support modes, a high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode, but in the present embodiment, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the probability that the normal power open state will be won in the normal power open lottery process using the normal power random number counter C4 and the mode of determining the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is executed on the normal figure display unit 38a are determined. It is constant regardless of the gaming state, and the number of times the normal electric accessory 34a is opened in the open state, one open period of the general electric accessory 34a, and the general electric accessory 34a in the open state of the ordinary electric. The execution mode of the drive control of the universal electric accessory 34a, such as the closing period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state when the open state occurs a plurality of times, is also constant regardless of the gaming state. Is. As a result, it is not necessary to change the mode of display control of the general map display unit 38a and the mode of drive control of the general electric accessory 34a according to the type of support mode, so that the program capacity for executing these controls is not required. And the data capacity can be suppressed. Since there is only one type of support mode, the normal gaming state in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the high-probability state in the present embodiment is a high-probability winning / losing lottery mode. It is a gaming state that is a mode.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are provided in the second special figure holding area 126, and a plurality of second holding information can be held and stored. In the embodiment, the number of second reserved information that can be stored in the second special figure reserved area 126 is one. Then, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game times in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is executed even when the game times are not executed in the second special figure display unit 37b. If a prize is won in the second operating port 34 when the situation is not the case, the second holding information is directly stored in the second special drawing holding area 126, and the game round is executed in the second special drawing display unit 37b. The second hold information is not acquired even if a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed triggered by the game times in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. .. As a result, in a situation where it is possible to start the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b, the player who desires to start the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b goes to the second operating port 34 each time. It will be necessary to perform a launch operation aimed at winning the prize.

In a configuration in which there is only one type of support mode, the setting mode of the duration of the game times is different between the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, so that the second special figure display unit 37b can be used in the normal game state. The execution frequency of the game times on the special figure display unit 37b is lower than the execution frequency of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a. Hereinafter, the setting mode of the duration of the game times will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 33.

In the normal game state, the setting mode of the duration of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a is the normal setting mode. In the normal setting mode, as shown in FIG. 33, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a deviation result and the reach effect does not occur at the time of complete deviation, the upper limit number (specifically) is in the first special figure holding area 125. If a new game round is started in a situation where the first hold information of (4) is stored, 2 seconds is selected as the duration of the game round, and the maximum number of pieces is set in the first special figure hold area 125. When a new game round is started in a situation where the first hold information is not stored, any one of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds is selected as the duration of the game round. In addition, in the normal setting mode, if the result of the hit / miss determination process is a missed result but the reach effect occurs at the time of the missed reach, or if the result of the hit / miss determination process is a jackpot result, the game times. As the duration of, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds, or 2 minutes is selected. In this case, the jackpot is more likely to select a longer duration than the missed reach, and the average duration selected is also longer at the jackpot than at the missed reach.

On the other hand, in the normal game state, the setting mode of the duration of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b is the long-term setting mode. In the long-term setting mode, the duration of the selected game times is only one type, and the duration of the one type of game times is irrespective of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result of the target game times. Is selected. The duration of this selected game is 10 minutes. The variable display period is longer than 2 minutes, which is the duration of the longest game times selected in the normal selection mode. As a result, in the normal gaming state, the execution frequency of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b is lower than the execution frequency of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a.

In the high probability state, the setting mode of the duration of the game times is different from the normal game state. Specifically, in the high probability state, the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a is one type regardless of whether or not the reach effect occurs when the result of the hit / miss determination process is out of order. Only one type is selected, and even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result, only one type is selected. In this case, the duration of the game times in the case of a jackpot result is set longer than the continuation period of the game times in the case of a loss result, and specifically, the duration of the game times in the case of a loss result is set. While it is 10 seconds, the duration of the game round is 30 seconds when a big hit result is obtained.

In the high probability state, the duration of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b is that the game times are triggered by the case where the result of the hit / fail determination process is a small hit result or the first hold information corresponding to the big hit result. If the second hold information triggers the start of the game round in the execution situation and the second hold information is treated as an outlier result, only one type is selected and the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the jackpot result. Even in the case of, only one type is selected. Specifically, the duration of the game times is 1 second when the result is a small hit or when it is treated as a missed result, whereas the duration of the game times is 1 minute and 30 seconds when the result is a big hit. It has become.

Here, the duration of the game round selected in the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the big hit result in the high probability state. It is set to a period shorter than the duration of the game times selected in the game times. In addition, the duration of the game times selected in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state is the game times triggered by the first hold information in the high probability state. It is set to a period shorter than the duration of the selected game times, and further, the continuation of any game times that can be selected in the game times triggered by the first hold information or the second hold information in the normal game state. It is set to a period shorter than the period. That is, in the high probability state, the duration of the game times selected in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result is shorter than the duration of the game times in any other case. It is set. As a result, it is possible to shorten the digestion period of the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state, and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is generated per unit time. It is possible to increase the number of times.

On the other hand, the duration of the game round selected in the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state. Not only is it longer than the duration of the game selected in the game, but it is also set to be longer than the duration of the game selected in the game triggered by the first hold information in the high probability state. Has been done. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the jackpot result will be generated in the game round triggered by the second hold information.

Next, how the game progresses in each of the normal game state and the high probability state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 (a) shows the period in which the probability is high, FIG. 34 (b) shows the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the second special figure display. Part 37b shows the duration of the game times, FIG. 34 (d) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result, and FIG. 34 (e) shows the execution of the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result. Indicates the period.

In the normal game state, as described above, the setting mode of the duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b is the long-term setting mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the game times are started a plurality of times on the first special figure display unit 37a including each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t7. During this period, the second special figure display unit 37b executes the game only once from the timing of t2 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 34 (c). As described above, in the normal gaming state, the execution frequency of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a is higher than the execution frequency of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a started at the timing of t7 ends at the timing of t8. In this case, since the first hold information that triggered the start of the game round corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, the jackpot result is displayed at the timing of t8 when the game round ends, as shown in FIG. 34 (e). The open / close execution mode is started. Then, the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t9. As described above, since the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a high-accuracy jackpot result, the gaming state shifts to the high-probability state at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 34A. Further, since the first reserved information is held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 at the timing of t9 and the second reserved information is held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, the second reserved information is held and stored at the timing of t9. , As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are started, and as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are started.

The game times in the first special figure display unit 37a started at the timing of t9 will continue until the timing of t17 as shown in FIG. 34 (b), and the first between the timing of t9 and the timing of t17. 2 The game times on the special figure display unit 37b are executed a plurality of times, and after each game time, an open / close execution mode triggered by a small hit result is generated. That is, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are executed, such as the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, and the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. At the same time, since each of these game times is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, the timing of t13 to the timing of t14, and the timing of t16. The opening / closing execution mode is executed triggered by the small hit result, such as the timing from timing to t18. In this case, the duration of the game round of the first special figure display unit 37a, which is a result of deviation in the high probability state, is set to 10 seconds, whereas the second special figure, which is a small hit result in the high probability state. The duration of the game round of the display unit 37b is set to 1 second, and the duration of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is set to 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the high probability state, while the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a, which is the result of the deviation, are executed once, the game times and the small hit result of the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the small hit result. The combination of open / close execution modes can occur 3 to 4 times.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t16, which are the situations in which the game round is executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, are shown in FIG. 34 (d). The open / close execution mode is started with the small hit result as a trigger. As a result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started as compared with the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started after waiting for the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a to end. It is possible to increase the execution frequency per unit time.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are newly started. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), at the timing of t20, which is the situation in which the game round is being executed, the game round at the second special figure display unit 37b is started and the timing of t21 at which the game round ends. As shown in FIG. 34 (e), the open / close execution mode is started triggered by the small hit result. The opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t22.

After that, at the timing of t23, which is a situation in which the game rotation on the first special figure display unit 37a started at the timing of t19 continues, the game on the second special figure display unit 37b as shown in FIG. 34 (c). The times are started. The game times are triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. After that, at the timing of t24, the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a ends as shown in FIG. 34 (b), and at the timing of t25 thereafter, the second special figure as shown in FIG. 34 (c). The game round in the figure display unit 37b ends. Then, at the timing of t25, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started.

Next, a processing configuration that enables the progress of the game as described above will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special electric control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82, and FIG. 36 is the second special figure special electric control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. It is a flowchart which shows. The first special figure special electric control process is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), and the second special figure special electric control process is executed in step S215 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), first, the acquisition process of the first hold information is executed (step S1701). Further, in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), first, the second reserved information acquisition process is executed (step S1801).

In the acquisition process of the first reserved information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37 (a), a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 (step S1901: YES), and further, in the first special figure reserved area 125. When the number of the first reserved information stored is less than the upper limit stored number (step S1902: YES), in step S1903 and step S1904, as in steps S503 and S504 in the first embodiment, the first step is performed. 1 Execute the process for acquiring the hold information. After that, the hold command selection process is executed (step S1905). The details of the hold command selection process will be described later, but the process for selecting the first hold command corresponding to the content of the first hold information acquired this time is executed. Then, the first hold command selected in step S1905 is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S1906). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103, whereby the number of first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41. Is changed according to the increase in the number of pending items.

In the second reserved information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37 (b), even if the game is not being executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, any special figure is displayed. It is the case that the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game times in the parts 37a and 37b is not executed (step S2001: NO), and the second operating port 34 is won a prize (step S2002). : YES), the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second special figure holding area 126. As a result, the second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 126. The acquired second hold information immediately triggers the start of the game round on the second special figure display unit 37b.

Returning to the description of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), after executing the hold information acquisition process (step S1701 or step S1801), the first By executing the same processes as in steps S302 to S304 and steps S402 to S404 in the embodiments in steps S1702 to S1704 and steps S1802 to S1804, respectively, the values of the corresponding special electric power counters are supported. Jump to processing. In this case, in the first special figure special electric control process, when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1705) is executed, and the first special figure special electric counter When the value of is "1", the special figure changing process (step S1706) is to be executed, and when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure finalizing process (step S1707) is executed. ) Is the execution target, and when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "3", the special electric start processing (step S1708) is the execution target, and when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "4". The special electric power opening process (step S1709) is the execution target, and when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is "5", the special electric power closing process (step S1710) is the execution target, and the first special figure special electric power is executed. When the value of the counter is "6", the special electric power termination process (step S1711) is to be executed. Further, in the second special figure special electric control process, when the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1805) is executed, and the value of the second special figure special electric counter is executed. When is "1", the special figure changing process (step S1806) is executed, and when the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure finalizing process (step S1807) is executed. When the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "3", the special electric start processing (step S1808) is the execution target, and when the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "4", the execution target is executed. The processing during opening of the special electric power (step S1809) is the execution target, and when the value of the special electric power counter of the second special figure is "5", the processing during closing of the special electric power (step S1810) is the execution target of the special electric power counter of the second special figure. When the value is "6", the special electric power end process (step S1811) is the execution target, and when the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "7", the small hit process (step S1812) is the execution target. It becomes.

Of the above-mentioned processes, the special figure changing process (step S1706, step S1806), the special electric power opening process (step S1709, step S1809), and the special electric power closing process (step S1710, step S1810) are the same as those in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted. Processing other than these will be described below.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation start process executed in step S1705 in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35) and step S1805 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36).

In the special figure fluctuation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) this time (step S2101). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be executed in the other. In this case, if step S2101 is executed and the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) this time, the processes after step S2102 are executed. The start of new game rounds is restricted. As a result, in the situation where the open / close execution mode is executed triggered by the game times of the jackpot result in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times in the other are newly started. It is regulated not to be done. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the open / close execution mode.

Here, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), whether or not the value of the first special figure special electric counter is any of "3" to "6" is determined. If it is determined in step S2101 and any of "3" to "6" is satisfied, the processing after step S2102 is not executed. As a result, in a situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a is being executed, a new game time is not started in the second special figure display unit 37b.

On the other hand, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), the step is whether or not the value of the second special figure special electric counter is any of "3" to "6". Judgment in S2101, if any of "3" to "6", the processing after step S2102 is not executed, whereas the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "7". Executes the processes after step S2102. When the value of the special electric counter of the second special figure is "7", the small hit processing (step S1812) is executed as described above, but the details of the small hit processing will be described later. The process for controlling the execution of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed. That is, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are not started in the situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in the second special figure display unit 37b is executed, but the second special figure display unit 37b. It is started in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game times corresponding to the small hit result in the figure display unit 37b is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a.

By the way, the shortest period of the duration of the game times executed by the first special figure display unit 37a is set to be longer than the longest period required to end the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result. There is. Therefore, even if the game round is started on the first special figure display unit 37a in the situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the open / close execution is triggered by the small hit result. Exit after the mode ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the corresponding number of pending items is one or more (step S2102). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), it is determined whether or not one or more first reserved information is stored in the first special figure holding area 125, and this time In the case of the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not one or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 126. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the data setting process is executed (step S2103). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), the processing content of the data setting process is the same as step S703 in the first embodiment. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), the data setting process shifts to the execution area 127b for the second special figure stored in the second special figure holding area 126. Later, the second special figure holding area 126 is cleared to "0".

After the data setting process is executed, the game times are executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) this time as in step S704 in the first embodiment, and the game is played. It is determined whether or not the hold information that triggered the start of the round corresponds to the jackpot result (step S2104). If a negative determination is made in step S2104, a hit / fail determination process is executed (step S2105).

In the winning / failing determination process, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the first special figure display unit 37a, the low probability winning / failing table for the first special figure (see FIG. 32 (a)) is displayed. Read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first special figure display unit 37a, the high probability winning / failing table for the first special figure (see FIG. 32 (b)). Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the second special drawing display unit 37b, the low probability winning / failing table for the second special figure (see FIG. 32 (c)). ) Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the second special drawing display unit 37b, the high probability winning / failing table for the second special figure (FIG. 32 (d)). (See) is read from the main ROM 83. After reading the pass / fail table, the pass / fail judgment is made from the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round. Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit / fail table. Further, when the start target of the game round this time is the second special figure display unit 37b, if it does not match the numerical information set as the big hit result, it is set as the small hit result in the above-mentioned hit / fail table. It is determined whether or not the information matches any of the numerical information provided.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result (step S2106: YES), the processes of steps S2107 to S2109 are executed in the same manner as in steps S707 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the result of the hit / fail determination process is not a big hit result but a small hit result (step S2106: NO, step S2110: YES), "1" is set in the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2111). As already described, the small hit result does not occur on the first special figure display unit 37a side, but occurs only on the second special figure display unit 37b side. After that, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S2112). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is specified from the stop result table for the small hit result stored in advance in the main ROM 83. Then, the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S2110: NO), the stop result setting process for the miss result is executed (step S2113). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result, and further, the first It is one type common to the special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, that is, the game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) this time, and the hold that triggered the start of the game round is held. When the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the missed result already described is executed without executing the hit / fail determination process (step S2113). That is, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game round is being executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game round can be started in the other. However, if the hold information that triggered the start of the already executed game round corresponds to one of the jackpot results, the hold information that triggered the start of the newly executed game round will be used. Regardless of whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, it will be a game time corresponding to the off result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the jackpot results from being executed twice. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the start of a new game round is prevented when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, the hold information for which the game round is to be started is also acquired. Regardless, it may become clear that the game times currently being executed are the game times corresponding to the jackpot result when a new game time is not started, but the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring by configuring the configuration so that a new game round can be started.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game times are executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the opening and closing triggered by the game times of the small hit result on the second special figure display unit 37b. Execution mode can be started. In this case, in the situation where the game round corresponding to the big hit result is executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, even if the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result triggers the start of the game round. The game times triggered by the second hold information will result in a loss. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result from being started while the game times corresponding to the big hit result are being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a. .. Further, in addition to such a configuration, as described above, the shortest period of the duration of the game times executed by the first special figure display unit 37a is the longest required until the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is completed. Since the period is set longer than the period, even if the game round is started on the first special figure display unit 37a in the situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the game round is It ends after the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result ends. Therefore, the situation in which the open / close execution mode should be executed triggered by the big hit result in the first special figure display unit 37a and the situation in which the open / close execution mode should be executed triggered by the small hit result in the special figure display unit 37b overlap. It is possible to prevent it from occurring. Further, as in the first embodiment, when the process of step S2104 is executed, the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode should be executed triggered by the jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 37b The situation in which the open / close execution mode should be executed triggered by the jackpot result in is not duplicated. That is, the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a overlaps with the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode should be executed triggered by the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b. It is a configuration that does not occur.

When the processing of step S2109, step S2112 or step S2113 is executed, the specification processing of the variation display period is executed (step S2114). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the variable display period. In the variable display period specifying process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold information to be started this time is the first hold information and the current game state is the normal game state (step S2201). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the lottery process for the variable display period is executed (step S2202). In the lottery process of the variable display period, the same process as in steps S802 to S804 in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, as described above, the duration of the game is selected according to the normal setting mode, and the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the game is set as the variable display period.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2201, the reading process of the variable display period is executed (step S2203). In the read process, if the hold information to be started this time is the first hold information and the current game state is a high probability state, 10 seconds if the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order. Information is read from the main ROM 83, and if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result, the information for 30 seconds is read from the main ROM 83. Then, the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the read game times is defined as the variable display period. In this case, if the result is off, the reach effect does not occur in the decorative area 43 and the first individual display area 45 of the symbol display device 41, and if the result is a big hit, the decorative area of the symbol display device 41. Reach effect occurs in 43 and the first individual display area 45. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach effect is executed by the main MPU 82 or the sound light side MPU 93 even if the result is out of order, and the reach effect is generated and won. If this happens, a reach effect may be generated.

In the reading process of the variable display period, if the hold information to be started this time is the second hold information and the current game state is a high probability state, the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a small hit result. Alternatively, if the second hold information is treated as a disengagement result, the information of 1 second is read from the main ROM 83, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a jackpot result, the information of 1 minute 30 seconds is read from the main ROM 83. .. Then, the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the read game times is defined as the variable display period. In this case, if it is a small hit result, the reach effect does not occur in the decoration area 43 and the first individual display area 45 of the symbol display device 41, and if it is a big hit result, the decoration of the symbol display device 41 is performed. A reach effect is generated in the area 43 and the first individual display area 45. Further, when the duration of the game round is different from 1 second, the variation display of the symbols in each area 43 to 45, 47 of the symbol display device 41 is sequentially stopped in the order of left → right → middle. On the other hand, when the duration of the game round is 1 second, the variation display of the symbols G11 to G13 is stopped and displayed at the same time in the second individual display area 47 of the symbol display device 41, and the symbols G11 to 1 at that time are displayed. The combination of G13 is a combination corresponding to the small hit result (for example, "3.4.1"). As a result, even if the duration of the game times in the case of a small hit result is shorter than in other cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the small hit result has occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the result is a small hit, the variable display of the symbols may be sequentially stopped.

In the reading process of the variable display period, if the hold information to be started this time is the second hold information and the current game state is the normal game state, which result is the result of the pass / fail judgment process Also reads 10 minutes of information from the main ROM 83. Then, the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the read game times is defined as the variable display period. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result, the elapsed period of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is the game times when the game state is the normal game state and the first hold information is the start trigger. When the reference period of 9 minutes, which is longer than the maximum duration that can be selected in, is exceeded, the reach effect is started in the additional decorative area 44 of the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is a small hit result, the reach effect does not occur in the additional decorative area 44 of the symbol display device 41.

After executing the process of step S2202 or step S2203, the information of the fluctuation display period specified by any of these processes is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2204). As a result, the set of the variable display period of the game times that is the target of starting this time is completed.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 38), after executing the specification processing of the fluctuation display period, the processing of steps S215 to S2117 is executed in the same manner as in steps S712 to S714 in the first embodiment. To do. As a result, a new game round will be started.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination executed in step S1707 in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35) and step S1807 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36).

First, it is determined whether or not the final suspension period has elapsed (step S2301). When the final stop period has passed (step S2301: YES), it is specified whether or not there is an opportunity to shift the gaming state from the high probability state to the normal gaming state, and when the opportunity has occurred. Executes a process for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state (steps S2302 to S2305). The process will be described later.

When the processes of steps S2302 to S2305 are executed and the current game times are the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2306: YES), the current process is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. If it corresponds to 35), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and if this process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), the second special figure The value of the special electric counter is added by 1 (step S2307). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is the special electric start processing (step S1708). , Step S1808) corresponds to "3".

When the processes of steps S2302 to S2305 are executed, and the game times this time are the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b and the game times corresponding to the small hit result (step S2308: YES). , The value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 5 (step S2309). Since the value of the second special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the value of the second special figure special electric counter is the small hit process (step S1812) by adding 5. It becomes "7" corresponding to.

When the processes of steps S2302 to S2305 are executed and the game times this time do not correspond to either the big hit result or the small hit result (step S2308: NO), the current process is the first. If the special figure special electric control process (Fig. 35) is supported, the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and this process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Fig. 36). If so, the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2310). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S1705, step S1805).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special electric start processing executed in step S1708 in the first special electric special electric control process (FIG. 35) and step S1808 in the second special electric special electric control process (FIG. 36).

If it is before the start of the opening period of the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result (step S2401: YES), the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the current special electric special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36). By determining whether or not is "0", the game times are executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) this time. It is determined whether or not it is a situation (step S2402). If the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) is not "0" (step S2402: NO), the process during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is. Does not execute the process for starting the open / close execution mode. As a result, the special figure display on the side in which the game times are executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b and the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are executed. When the game times in the units 37a and 37b are completed first, the open / close execution mode is started after the game times in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side where the game times have not been completed are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the running game times from being forcibly ended at the end of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, and even though the game times are being executed. It is possible to prevent the open / close execution mode from being started.

By the way, as already explained, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed triggered by the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times in the other. Is a configuration that is not newly started. By having the configuration and the configuration of step S2402, the game round is not executed in the situation where the open / close execution mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result of the game in the situation where the game is being executed, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the open / close execution mode in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. It becomes.

When the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) is "0" (step S2402: YES), the information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result. (Specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S2403). After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S2404). As a result, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

If it is after the start of the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result (step S2401: NO), and if the opening period has elapsed (step S2405: YES), the opening / closing triggered by the jackpot result Executes the process to start the execution mode. Specifically, first, the round number setting process is executed (step S2406). In the setting process, "15" is set in the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 84. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the remaining number of executions of the round game by the main MPU 82. After that, the information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter to be controlled (step S2407), and one round is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84. Information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the maximum number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 in the game is set (step S2408). Then, the release setting process for the special electric power is executed (step S2409). In the open setting process, data is set so that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35). If it corresponds to FIG. 36), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric start processing is executed is "3", the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is the processing during opening of the special electric power (step S1709, step S1709). It becomes "4" corresponding to step S1809).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a special electric power termination process executed in step S1711 in the first special electric power control process (FIG. 35) and step S1811 in the second special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 36).

When the ending period set in the special electric opening processing (step S1709, step S1809) has elapsed (step S2501: YES), the game state setting process is executed. In the game state setting process, when "1" is set in the first high-probability jackpot flag or the second high-probability jackpot flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2502: YES), the opening / closing execution mode is started this time. Since it means that the jackpot result that triggered the jackpot is a high-accuracy jackpot result, "1" is set in the high-probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2503), and the game provided in the main RAM 84. “60” is set in the count counter (step S2504).

The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the high-probability jackpot result is completed, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result does not occur and the end reference number of times (specifically, 60 times). When the game times of are executed, the game state shifts from the high probability state to the normal game state. The game number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of times of the end reference number by the main MPU 82.

Here, the process for specifying the trigger for shifting the gaming state from the high probability state to the normal gaming state is executed in steps S2302 to S2305 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 40). Specifically, when the final stop period of the current game times has elapsed (step S2301: YES), if the value of the game count counter is 1 or more (step S2302: YES), the value of the game count counter is set to 1. Subtract (step S2303). Then, when the value of the game count counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2304: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2305). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the normal gaming state.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric power termination process (FIG. 42), when the jackpot result that triggered the start of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low probability jackpot result (step S2502: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "0". In addition to clearing (step S2505), the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2506). As a result, the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode this time becomes the normal gaming state.

When the process of step S2504 or step S2506 is executed, the clear process is executed (step S2507). As a result, the flag in which "1" is set among the first high-accuracy jackpot flag, the second high-accuracy jackpot flag, the first low-accuracy jackpot flag, and the second low-accuracy jackpot flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". At the same time, various flags and various counters used in the opening / closing execution mode this time are cleared to "0".

After that, if this process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and this process is the second special figure special electric control. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 36), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S1705, step S1805).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a small hit process executed in step S1812 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 43).

When the current processing time is the start timing of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result (step S2601: YES), the information on the open continuation period of the open / close number specified mode in the second special electric timer counter (specifically). Is set to 1.8 seconds) (step S2602), and information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the maximum number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close number specified mode is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. Set (step S2603). Then, the release setting process for the special electric power is executed (step S2604). In the open setting process, data is set so that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened.

When the current processing time is not the start timing of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result (step S2601: NO), the condition is that the special electric winning device 32 has been won (step S2605: YES). , The value of the winning counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S2606). Then, when the value of the winning counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2607: YES), a process for terminating the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed. Further, even when the special electric winning device 32 has not been won (step S2605: NO) or the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 84 is not "0" (step S2607: NO), the second Even if the value of the special electric timer counter is "0" and the open continuation period of the open / close number specified mode has elapsed (step S2608: YES), the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is terminated. Execute the process to make it.

In the process for terminating the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result, first, the close setting process for the special electric power is executed (step S2609). In the closing setting process, data is set so that the special electric winning device 32 is closed. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Then, after clearing the small hit flag of the main RAM 84 by "0" (step S2610), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared by "0" (step S2611). As a result, the value of the second special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S1805).

Next, a configuration for executing various notifications using the look-ahead of the pending information will be described.

As already explained, when the second hold information is the target of the hit / fail judgment process, if the big hit result is not obtained, the small hit result is obtained, and if the small hit result is obtained, the opening / closing number regulation mode is used. By shifting to a certain opening / closing execution mode, a prize may be generated in the special electric winning device 32. Further, even if the game round is being executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game round can be started in the other, and the game state. When is in a high probability state, the duration of the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result is 1 second, which is the shortest period, and the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode. Is started even in the situation where the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are being executed. As a result, in the high probability state, the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode is repeated in a short period of time, and the player pays out the game ball by winning the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode. The number of game balls possessed by the player will increase.

In this case, the high-probability state ends when 60 game rounds, which is the end reference number of times, is executed without generating a jackpot result. Then, if a big hit result occurs in the middle of the high probability state, more game times are generated in the second special figure display unit 37b by the time the game times corresponding to the big hit result are started, and the number of open / close numbers is specified. It is advantageous for the player to generate more open / close execution modes of the mode. On the other hand, even if the pending information is subject to the hit / fail determination process in the high probability state, it may not be the jackpot result if it is the target of the hit / fail determination process in the low probability state. Then, in the situation where such the first hold information is acquired, if the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are repeatedly generated and the number of times the game times are executed in the high probability state is set as the end reference number, the first 1 The profit of the jackpot result triggered by the pending information will be lost. Therefore, in such a case, the game times triggered by the first hold information can be executed when the number of times the game times are executed in the high probability state becomes the end reference number or immediately before that. It is possible to maximize the profit of the player.

Under such circumstances, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first hold information is newly acquired in a high probability state, whether or not the first hold information corresponds to the jackpot result at the acquired timing is determined. Look ahead. Then, when it is specified that it corresponds to the jackpot result, the launch of the game ball is stopped in relation to the content of the first hold information and the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state. Notification or notification for prompting the launch of the game ball is executed. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for executing such notification will be specifically described. The pre-reading as described above is not executed for the second hold information.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a selection process of a hold command executed by the main MPU 82. The hold command selection process is executed in step S1905 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37).

First, it is determined whether or not the first hold information acquired this time is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2701). Specifically, among the first reserved information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out, and the numerical information is referred to in the high probability state, which is a high probability table for the first special figure. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table. That is, the high probability accuracy table is referred to regardless of whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high probability state. As already explained, all the types of numerical information that give a big hit result in the low probability hit / fail table are included in the types of numerical information that give a big hit result in the high probability hit / fail table. In this case, by referring to the high probability hit / fail table for the first special figure in step S2701 and determining whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, the first hold information acquired this time is the normal gaming state and the high. It means that it is judged whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result in any of the probability states.

When the acquired first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2701: YES), the first hold information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure hold area 125 "1" is set in the jackpot hold flag provided in the area where is stored (step S2702). In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the hit random number area, the jackpot type area, and the reach random number area are defined in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125, respectively. A jackpot hold flag is separately provided, but unlike the first embodiment, the duration area and the set flag are not provided in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d.

After that, on condition that the current game state is a high probability state (step S2703: YES), it is determined whether or not the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result are being executed (step S2703: YES). Step S2704). If the game round of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed (step S2704: YES), the look-ahead notification is not executed. As described above, the hold information that triggers the start of the game round in the situation where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is executed is treated as corresponding to the missed result without executing the hit / fail determination process. Therefore, in a situation where the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, even if the game round triggered by the second hold information is newly started, the game round is used as an opportunity. The profits made will definitely not occur. In this case, in order to stop the firing of the game ball by not executing the look-ahead notification during the game round of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result as described above. It is possible to prevent the notification of the above and the notification for prompting the launch of the game ball (hereinafter, these notifications are also referred to as the notifications corresponding to the look-ahead results) from being executed meaninglessly.

If the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result are not being executed (step S2704: NO), the jackpot is held in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125. It is determined whether or not there are two or more areas in which "1" is set in the flag (step S2705). When there are two or more areas in which "1" is set in the jackpot hold flag, the first hold information that triggers the start of the game round corresponds to the jackpot result before the first hold information acquired this time. It means that you are doing it. In this case, there is a possibility that the notification corresponding to the look-ahead result has already been executed at the timing when the first hold information of the jackpot result that triggers the start of the game round is acquired. In such a situation, if the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result is executed triggered by the first hold information that later triggers the start of the game round, the player may be confused. Further, even if the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result is not executed for the first hold information of the jackpot result that triggers the start of the game round, the first hold information of the jackpot result that triggers the start of the game round is not executed first. Regardless of this, if the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result is executed triggered by the first hold information that later triggers the start of the game, the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result of the content that does not match the current situation is executed. There is a possibility that it will end up. On the other hand, when there are two or more areas in which the jackpot hold flag is set to "1", it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience from occurring by not executing the look-ahead notification. Will be.

When only one of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 has the jackpot holding flag set to "1" (step S2705: NO), the jackpot result is supported. It means that the first hold information to be performed is only the first hold information acquired this time. In this case, the process that enables the pre-reading notification after step S2706 is executed.

Specifically, first, the number of first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 125 is grasped (step S2706). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is less than the reference number (step S2707). As already explained, the duration of the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the out-of-order result in the high probability state is fixed at 10 seconds. In addition, the duration of the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state is fixed at 1 second, and the open / close number regulation mode that is executed when the small hit result is obtained. The duration of the open / close execution mode is fixed at 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the duration of the game round (specifically, "10") triggered by the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of the first reserved information grasped in step S2706 and the first reserved information corresponding to the deviation result in the high probability state. ), And if the game round is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the reference period is calculated by adding the remaining duration of the game round to the product result. Then, this reference period is set to the duration of the game round (specifically, "1") triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state, and the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing number is specified mode. Divide by the result of the sum with the duration (specifically, "1.8"). If there is no remainder as a result of this division, and if the game is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the "value of the quotient based on the result of the above division" is set to the "first special figure holding area". The result of adding the "number of first reserved information stored in 125" is used as the reference number, and unless the game is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the "value of the quotient based on the result of the above division". The result of adding "a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 125" is used as the reference number. On the other hand, when a remainder occurs as a result of division, if the game is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the "value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the quotient based on the result of the above division" is added to the "first". 1 The result of adding the "number of first reserved information stored in the special figure holding area 125" is used as the reference number, and if the game is not being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the "result of the above division" is used. The result of adding "a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the quotient according to the above" and "a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of first reserved information stored in the first special figure holding area 125" is used as a reference number. By the time the game round is started with the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time as the reference number calculated as described above, the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b This is the maximum number of game times that can be started. When the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is less than the reference number, the game round starts when the remaining number of continuations of the high probability state is triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time. It means that the number of game times that can be started by the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is less than the maximum number of times.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2707, it is determined whether or not the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time is the hold information that will be the jackpot result regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state or the high probability state. Determine (step S2708). Specifically, among the first reserved information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read, and the numerical information is a low accuracy table for the first special figure which is referred to in the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table. As already explained, the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the low probability accuracy table is included in the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high probability accuracy table, so that the low probability for the first special figure is included. The hold information corresponding to the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the win / fail table is the jackpot result in either the normal gaming state or the high probability state.

If the first hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a big hit regardless of whether it is in the normal game state or the high probability state, the first hold information does not trigger the start of the game round in the high probability state. However, a big hit result will occur. Therefore, in such a case, by making an affirmative judgment in step S2708 and preventing the processing of step S2709 and step S2710 from being executed, the remaining number of continuations of the high probability state corresponds to the jackpot result acquired this time. Even if it is less than or equal to the maximum number of game times of the second special figure display unit 37b that can be started by the time the game times are started triggered by the first hold information, the firing of the game ball is stopped. Prevent the notification from being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the notification for stopping the firing of the game ball from being executed in a situation where it is not necessary to stop the firing of the game ball.

If a negative determination is made in step S2708, the calculation process of the number of notifications is executed (step S2709). Specifically, if the game times are being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the first hold stored in the first special figure hold area 125 is selected from the "value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84". The value obtained by subtracting the "number of pieces of information" is calculated as the number of notifications this time. Further, if the game times are not being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 is described from the "value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84". The value obtained by subtracting "the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number" is calculated as the number of notifications this time.

After that, the hold command for the number of times notification in which the calculated information on the number of notifications is set is set as the first hold command to be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S2710). This first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37 (a)). The details of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described later, but when the hold command for number notification is received as the first hold command, the second special figure is within the range of the number of notifications set in the hold command for notification of the number of times. A notification indicating that the firing of the game ball should be stopped is executed so as to stop the execution of the game times on the display unit 37b.

On the other hand, when a negative judgment is made in step S2707 or an affirmative judgment is made in step S2708, whether or not the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time is the hold information that results in a low probability jackpot result. Determine (step S2711). Specifically, among the first hold information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read, and the numerical information is one of the numerical information of the low accuracy jackpot result set in the distribution table. Determine if you are doing it. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2711, the hold command for promoting firing is set as the first hold command to be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S2712). This first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37 (a)). Although the details of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described later, when the hold command for promotion of launch is received as the first hold command, the game ball is executed so that the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b are executed as many times as possible. Make sure that the notification is executed to prompt the launch.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2703, a positive judgment is made in step S2704, a positive judgment is made in step S2705, or a negative judgment is made in step S2711, a normal hold command is sent to the sound light side MPU 93. It is set as the first hold command to be transmitted (step S2713). This first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37 (a)). The sound and light side MPU 93 will be described in detail later, but when the normal hold command is received as the first hold command, the notification for indicating that the number of holds of the first hold information has increased is executed.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a hold command corresponding process executed by the display side MPU 103. The hold command correspondence process is executed in the command correspondence process of step S1102 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 17).

When the first hold command is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the sound light side MPU 93, the sound light side MPU 93 transmits the corresponding first hold command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the first hold command (step S2801: YES), the display side MPU 103 executes the hold display image increasing process (step S2802). As a result, the number of reserved images G1 displayed in the normal hold display area 42 of the symbol display device 41 increases by one in the normal game state, and the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 in the high probability state. The hold image G1 displayed in is increased by one.

When the first hold command received this time corresponds to the hold command for number notification (step S2803: YES), the start processing of the number notification is executed (step S2804). In the count notification start process, the information on the number of notifications set in the hold command for the number notification is read, and the number notification corresponding to the information on the number of notifications is executed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the number-of-times notification executed by the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the character image "Fluctuate the special figure 2 11 times in a row !! NG !!" is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as the number of times notification. To. The player who confirms this number of times notification repeats the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b 11 times in the current high probability state, and then stops the firing of the game ball to play the game on the first special figure display unit 37a. It becomes possible to recognize that the execution should be waited for. Then, by performing the firing operation in this way, after generating the maximum number of small hit results that can be generated in the high probability state this time, triggered by the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b, the second 1 It is possible to generate a jackpot result triggered by a game round on the special figure display unit 37a.

Returning to the description of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 45), after executing the count notification start process in step S2804, "1" is set in the count notification flag provided in the display side RAM 105 (step S2805). The number-of-times notification flag is a flag for the display-side MPU 103 to specify that the number-of-times notification is being executed. The state in which the number-of-times notification is executed ends when a new jackpot result occurs, and the number-of-times notification flag is cleared to "0" at that time.

When the first hold command received this time corresponds to the notification command for launch promotion instead of the hold command for number notification (step S2806: YES), the start processing of the launch promotion notification is executed (step S2807). In the start processing of the launch promotion notification, the launch promotion notification is executed by the symbol display device 41. FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the launch promotion notification executed by the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the character image "Turn as much as possible !!" is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a launch promotion notification. The player who has confirmed this launch promotion notification continues firing the game ball so that the game rotation on the second special figure display unit 37b is executed as much as possible in the current high probability state. Then, by performing the firing operation in this way, a small hit triggered by the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b is generated by the time when a big hit result triggered by the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a is generated. It is possible to generate as many results as possible. The state in which the launch promotion notification is executed ends when a new jackpot result occurs.

Returning to the description of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 45), when a variation pattern command indicating that the game round should be newly started is received (step S2808: YES), the hold display image reduction process is executed (step S2809). ). As a result, in the normal game state, the display of the hold image G1 in the normal hold display area 42 of the symbol display device 41 is reduced by one, and in the high probability state, in the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41. The display of the reserved image G1 is reduced by one. After that, on condition that "1" is set in the number-of-times notification flag of the display-side RAM 105 (step S2810: YES), the number-of-times notification update process is executed (step S2811). By executing the update process, the number of times notification displayed on the symbol display device 41 is "Fluctuate special figure 2 continuously N times !! Fluctuations exceeding N times are NG !!" (N is The value of N of the character image (an integer of 1 or more) is subtracted by 1.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Even if the mode shifts to the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode ends when the number of times the game is executed reaches the end reference number in the high-probability mode. As a result, in the high-probability mode, the game is performed while being aware of the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the look-ahead notification corresponding to the content of the first hold information is executed at a timing before the first hold information becomes the execution target of the game times. As a result, the player can predict the content of the first hold information even before the game round triggered by the first hold information is started. In this case, the execution content of the look-ahead notification is different with at least one determination criterion as the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode. As a result, the content of the look-ahead notification can be associated with the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability mode, and the degree of attention to the look-ahead notification can be increased.

In the configuration in which the first hold information and the second hold information are individually acquired, the look-ahead notification is started when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining games in the high probability mode are acquired. The look-ahead notification is executed in a state associated with the number of times of continuation. As a result, when the look-ahead notification is executed, either the game times triggered by the first hold information or the game times triggered by the second hold information within the range of the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode. It becomes possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game should be digested.

In the high-probability mode, the game times triggered by the second hold information are more easily digested than the game times triggered by the first hold information. As a result, in the high probability mode, many game times are executed triggered by the second hold information. In this case, the look-ahead notification is executed when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining game times of the high probability mode are continued at the timing when the first hold information is acquired. The execution content of the look-ahead notification will differ depending on the number of times. As a result, the situation in which the game times triggered by the second hold information are preferentially digested should be continued as it is, or the game times triggered by the second hold information are prevented from being executed and the jackpot result is dealt with. 1 It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game round should be executed triggered by the hold information.

In a configuration in which many game times are executed triggered by the second hold information in the high probability mode, even if the second hold information does not correspond to the big hit result, it corresponds to the small hit result. The open / close execution mode occurs while not changing to the low probability mode. In this case, it is advantageous for the player to execute a large number of game times triggered by the second hold information in the high probability mode. On the other hand, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in the high probability mode, it is advantageous for the player to execute the game times triggered by the first hold information in the high probability mode. Become. In this configuration, the look-ahead notification is executed when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining game times of the high probability mode are continued at the timing when the first hold information is acquired. Since the execution content of the look-ahead notification differs depending on the number of times, the game times triggered by any hold information are executed within the range of the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode through the execution contents of the look-ahead notification. It is possible to make the player aware of whether or not it should be done.

Since the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information are executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the number of times the game times are executed per unit time. Further, in the high probability mode, the duration of the game rounds triggered by the second hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result is shorter than that of the game rounds triggered by the first hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result. Therefore, in the high-probability mode, the game times triggered by the second hold information are easily digested. Further, even if the game times triggered by the second hold information are easily digested in the high probability mode as described above, the game times and the second hold information triggered by the first hold information are triggered as described above. Since the game times are executed in duplicate with the above-mentioned game times, the game times triggered by the first hold information are also executed in the high probability mode. In this case, the look-ahead notification is executed when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining game times of the high probability mode are continued at the timing when the first hold information is acquired. Since the execution content of the look-ahead notification is different in relation to the number of times, it should be ensured that the game times triggered by any of the hold information are executed within the range of the number of times the remaining game times of the high probability mode are continued. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not there is.

Regardless of the number of times the remaining game times in the high-probability mode are continued at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, or the number of times the game times are executed triggered by the second hold information. When the number of game times triggered by the first hold information is the number of times that can be started in the current high probability mode, it is notified as a look-ahead notification that a launch operation aiming at acquisition of the second hold information should be performed. As a result, the player can be made aware that as many game times as possible triggered by the second hold information should be digested before the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are started. It will be possible.

When the number of times the remaining game times in the high probability mode are continued at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times the game times are executed triggered by the second hold information. If the number of times the game times triggered by the first hold information cannot be started in the current high probability mode, the number of times the game times executed triggered by the second hold information should be less than the predetermined number as a look-ahead notification. Is notified. As a result, the player is informed that the number of executions of the game times triggered by the second hold information should be adjusted so that the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are executed in the high probability mode. It becomes possible to recognize.

Regardless of the number of times the remaining game times in the high-probability mode are continued at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, or the number of times the game times are executed triggered by the second hold information. When the number of times the game times triggered by the first hold information can be started in the current high probability mode, and when the first hold information corresponds to the high probability jackpot result, the launch of the game ball is prompted. The notification for launch promotion is prevented from being executed, and the notification for launch promotion is executed when the first hold information corresponds to the low probability jackpot result. If the first hold information corresponds to the low probability jackpot result, the notification for launch promotion is executed, and if the high probability mode cannot be continued, it will be up to that point. It is possible to encourage the player to digest as many game times as possible triggered by the second hold information so that a large amount of profit is given to the player. On the other hand, when the first hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, the notification for launch promotion is not executed, so that many game times triggered by the second hold information are digested. As a result, a situation occurs in which the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is executed before the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result. Can be prevented from being triggered by the execution of the notification for promoting the launch.

When the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times the game times are executed triggered by the second hold information. When the number of times the game times triggered by the first hold information cannot be started in the current high probability mode, or when the first hold information is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode. The look-ahead notification for the number of times notification indicating that the number of times the game is executed should be less than the predetermined number of times triggered by the second hold information is executed, and the first hold information is set to the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In any case, if the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result, the look-ahead notification for the number of times notification is not executed. When the first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode, the look-ahead notification for the number of times notification is executed so that the first hold information is a game in the high probability mode. It is possible to make the player aware of what should be the trigger for the execution of the times. On the other hand, if the first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in either the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the first hold information is executed after the end of the high probability mode. Even if it becomes an opportunity, a big hit result will occur. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the first hold information in the current high-probability mode. Therefore, in such a situation, the need for execution is low by preventing the look-ahead notification for the number-of-times notification from being executed. It is possible to prevent the look-ahead notification for the number of times notification from being executed in the situation.

Even in a situation where the small hit result is triggered by the second hold information and the open / close execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is being executed, the game round can be executed triggered by the first hold information. This makes it possible to increase the digestibility of game times.

The game round is not executed in the situation where the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the opening / closing execution mode.

One of the first hold information and the second hold information, and the other of the first hold information and the second hold information in a situation where the game is being executed triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. When the game round is started with the hold information of the above, the other hold information is not treated as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, in a situation where the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is executed triggered by the hold information of one of the first hold information and the second hold information, the open / close corresponding to the jackpot result is triggered by the other hold information. It is possible to prevent duplicate execution modes from occurring. On the other hand, in one of the situations where the game round is executed triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result and the open / close execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is executed. When the game round is started with the first hold information as a trigger, the first hold information can be treated as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, the first hold information corresponding to the big hit result is executed as a game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, and the open / close execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is executed. It is possible to prevent the information from being not treated as the pending information corresponding to the jackpot result because of the fact that the information is present.

The duration of the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the big hit result in the high probability mode is the duration and the small hit of the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability mode. It is set to a period equal to or longer than the total period with the execution period of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the result. As a result, in a situation where the game round or the open / close execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is being executed triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, the first hold information corresponding to the big hit result is used as an opportunity. Even if the game round is started, the game round triggered by the first hold information is finished after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is finished. This makes it possible to prevent the open / close execution mode corresponding to the small hit result and the open / close execution mode corresponding to the big hit result from being executed in duplicate.

An event that results in a loss in a game round triggered by the second hold information occurs only in a situation in which a game round in which the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. In this case, in the situation where the game times with the first hold information as the execution target are being executed, if the game times with the second hold information as the execution target are out of order, the first hold currently being executed It means that a big hit result occurs in the game times in which the information is executed. That is, it is possible to execute the notification of the occurrence of the jackpot result by utilizing the event that the second hold information is the execution target and the result is missed.

<Another form of the fourth embodiment>
It should be noted that the content is not limited to the description of the fourth embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the fourth embodiment.

-Instead of the configuration in which the content of the notification to be executed is determined among the look-ahead notification for the number of times notification and the look-ahead notification for launch promotion according to the number of executions of the remaining game times in the high probability mode, the high probability mode The content of these notifications may be determined according to the number of games executed in.

-When the look-ahead notification for the number of times notification is executed, the period until the game round in which the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed may be notified. As a result, the player can recognize the period until the game round in which the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed is started, and as many small hit results as possible are generated in that period. As described above, the launch of the game ball toward the second operating port 34 will be continued.

-There is no low-accuracy jackpot result as a type of jackpot result, and if a jackpot result is obtained, a configuration may be configured in which a high-accuracy jackpot result is surely obtained. Further, instead of the configuration, if the second hold information is the target of the hit / fail judgment process and the jackpot result is obtained, the high accuracy jackpot result is surely obtained, or the second hold information is the target of the hit / fail judgment process and the jackpot result. In that case, it is possible to win a prize in the V winning opening, and the winning in the V winning opening may occur, resulting in a high-accuracy jackpot result. In the case of these configurations, at least in the game times in which the second hold information is the execution target, a low probability jackpot result is not obtained. Therefore, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at the timing when it is surely executed within the range of the high probability mode, the look-ahead notification for launch promotion is executed regardless of the type of the jackpot result. It is preferable that the configuration is as follows.

-Instead of the configuration in which the normal game state and the high probability state are set as the game states, the low frequency support state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode Is set, and for a configuration in which the low frequency support state is set when the number of game times executed in the high frequency support state reaches the end reference number, for the number notification as in the fourth embodiment above. A configuration may be applied in which the look-ahead notification of the above and the look-ahead notification for promoting the launch are executed.

-The game times for which the first hold information is the execution target and the game times for which the second hold information is the execution target are not limited to the overlapping execution, and one of these game times is used. Is executed, the start of the other game is prevented, and the game with the second hold information as the execution target is executed with priority over the game with the first hold information as the execution target. A configuration in which pre-reading notification for number-of-times notification and pre-reading notification for launch promotion are executed as in the fourth embodiment may be applied to the configuration to be performed.

-In a situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the start of the game round may be prevented. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result. Further, the configuration in which the look-ahead notification for the number of times notification and the look-ahead notification for launch promotion as in the fourth embodiment may be executed may be applied to the configuration.

-The configuration may be such that the start of the game round is allowed even in the situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the digestibility of the game times. However, in this configuration, it is conceivable that the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends in the situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is executed. In this case, the open / close execution mode may be newly started after the open / close execution mode currently being executed is completed, and the open / close execution mode corresponding to the end of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is the current state. It may be configured to be executed in a form integrated with the executed opening / closing execution mode (for example, the number of executions of the round game is increased).

-When the second hold information is the target of the hit / fail judgment process, the configuration may be such that the result may be a loss result that is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result.

-Of the first hold information and the second hold information, the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target and the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target are executed in duplicate. If the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends first, the open / close execution mode starts until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target ends. Is not limited to the configuration in which is delayed, and at the timing when the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends, the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target are executed. It may be configured to forcibly terminate and immediately start the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from becoming long.

In addition, at the timing when the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends, the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the missed result is the execution target are temporarily stopped, and then the open / close execution mode ends. After that, the once-stopped game times may be restarted, or the temporarily stopped game times may be restarted from the beginning. In the configuration in which the once stopped game times are restarted from the beginning, the hit / fail judgment process for the hold information that triggered the start of the game times may be newly executed, and the hit / fail judgment process in the temporarily stopped game times may be performed. The configuration may be such that the result is inherited.

-When a game round in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is executed and a game round in which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is the execution target is started, the game round on the different side The hold information is not limited to the configuration that is treated as a result of deviation regardless of its contents, and although the hold information on the different side is the execution target of the pass / fail judgment process, the hold information on the different side is the execution target. When the game round is completed, it may be treated as a loss result regardless of the execution result of the win / fail determination process.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for improving the playability and the interest of the game is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the first embodiment, at least a part of the period during which the game times are executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least a part of the period during which the game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b. However, in the present embodiment, when the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times are performed in the other. In addition to the configuration in which the game is not started, a new game time is not started in the situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the game time in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is executed. In this way, when the game round is executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game round is not started in the other. In the symbol display device 41, the decoration area 43, the first hold display area 46, and the second hold display area 48 are arranged as shown in FIG. 5B in both the normal game state and the high probability state. On the other hand, the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 are not displayed. Then, regardless of whether the game times are executed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, the variation display of the symbol is displayed in the decorative area 43. Is executed.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the small hit result is not set as a result of the hit / fail judgment process, and the case where the first hold information is the execution target of the hit / fail judgment process and the case where the second hold information is hit / fail The same hit / fail table (low probability hit / fail table in the normal gaming state, high probability hit / fail table in the high probability state) is referred to in the case where the determination process is to be executed.

In the first embodiment, the same distribution table is referred to when the first hold information is the execution target of the distribution determination process and when the second hold information is the execution target of the distribution determination process. However, in the present embodiment, the reference distribution table is different between the first hold information and the second hold information. 47 (a) and 47 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the distribution table in this embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), in the present embodiment, 4R jackpot results, 8R jackpot results, and 16R jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results. All of these jackpot results are jackpot results that trigger the execution of the open / close execution mode, which is the round number regulation mode, and the game state after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high probability state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). It is a big hit result. That is, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot result in which the gaming state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). However, the high-probability state ends when the number of game times executed without the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs as in the fourth embodiment, and the game state becomes the end reference number, and the game state is the normal game. It will shift to the state. This end reference number of times is the same regardless of the jackpot result.

The number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is different between the 4R jackpot result, the 8R jackpot result, and the 16R jackpot result. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 4R jackpot result, round games occur four times, and in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 8R jackpot result, round games occur eight times, triggered by the 16R jackpot result. In the open / close execution mode, round games occur 16 times. Therefore, among the jackpot results, the 4R jackpot result is the most disadvantageous, the 8R jackpot result is the next most advantageous, and the 16R jackpot result is the most advantageous.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the jackpot result is displayed in the sorting table for the first special figure, which is referred to when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target of the sorting determination process. A 4R jackpot result and a 16R jackpot result are set as the types of. In this case, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 89" corresponds to the 4R jackpot result, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 16R jackpot result. Therefore, when a jackpot result is obtained triggered by the first hold information, the probability of a 4R jackpot result is higher than the probability of a 16R jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), the jackpot result is displayed in the sorting table for the second special figure, which is referred to when the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target of the sorting determination process. 8R jackpot result and 16R jackpot result are set as the types of. In this case, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49" corresponds to the 8R jackpot result, and "50 to 99" corresponds to the 16R jackpot result. Therefore, when the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information, the probability of the 16R jackpot result and the probability of the 8R jackpot result are the same.

When comparing the 1st hold information and the 2nd hold information, if the big hit result is triggered by the 1st hold information, the 4R big hit result can be selected and the 4R big hit result is obtained rather than the probability of the 16R big hit result. While the probability is higher, when the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information, the 8R jackpot result can be selected instead of the 4R jackpot result not being selected, and the probability of becoming the 16R jackpot result and the 8R jackpot result. Is the same as the probability of becoming. Therefore, the case where the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information is more advantageous to the player than the case where the jackpot result is triggered by the first hold information. Furthermore, the probability of a jackpot result when the hit / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information is the same as the probability of a jackpot result when the hit / fail determination process is executed for the second hold information. Is. Then, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game times triggered by the second hold information than to execute the game times triggered by the first hold information.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a special electric power termination process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. In addition, in this embodiment, since the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are not executed in duplicate, the first embodiment is as described in the first embodiment. The 1 special figure special electric control process and the 2nd special figure special electric control process are not set individually, but the common special figure special electric control process is executed for both the 1st reserved information and the 2nd reserved information. .. The basic processing configuration of the common special figure special electric control process is the same as that of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. Then, in the common special figure special electric control process, when the value of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 is "0", the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1". When the special figure fluctuation processing is executed, when the special figure special electric counter value is "2", the special figure finalization processing is executed, and when the special figure special electric counter value is "3". The special electric power start process is executed, and when the value of the special figure special electric power counter is "4", the special electric power open processing is executed, and when the special figure special electric power counter value is "5", the special electric power closed process is executed. , When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "6", the special electric end processing is executed.

The ending period is set in the process during the opening of the special electric power as in the first embodiment, but when the ending period has elapsed (step S2901: YES), the game state setting process is executed. .. In the game state setting process, "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2902), and "80" is set in the game count counter of the main RAM 84 (step S2903).

The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is completed, when the game rounds of the end reference number (specifically, 80 times) are executed without the jackpot result occurring. The game state is configured to shift from the high probability state to the normal game state. The game number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of times of the end reference number by the main MPU 82. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2904). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When the final stop period of the current game times has elapsed (step S3001: YES), if the value of the game count counter is 1 or more (step S3002: YES), the value of the game count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3003). ). Then, when the value of the game count counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3004: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3005). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the normal gaming state.

When a negative determination is made in step S3002, a negative determination is made in step S3004, or the process of step S3005 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game number is the game number corresponding to the jackpot result. (Step S3006). When the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result (step S3006: YES), the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3007). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition corresponds to the special electric start processing by adding 1. It becomes "3". On the other hand, when the game times this time do not correspond to the jackpot result (step S3006: NO), the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3008). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation start process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the second reserved information is held in the second special figure holding area 126 on condition that either the first reserved information or the second reserved information is held and stored (step S3101: YES). It is determined whether or not it is stored (step S3102). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a maximum of four first reserved information is reserved and stored in the first special figure holding area 125, and a maximum of four pieces are stored in the second special figure holding area 126. The second hold information of is stored on hold.

When the second hold information is held and stored (step S3102: YES), the data setting process of the second special figure is executed (step S3103). In the data setting process of the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the execution area 127b for the second special figure. As a result, the target for starting this game round is the second special figure display unit 37b. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area 126a and the second area 126b →. The data in each area is shifted such that the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c, and so on. After that, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second reduction command indicating that the second holding information in the second special figure holding area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display side MPU 103 to display the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 of the hold information. Change in response to the decrease in the number.

If the second hold information is not stored on hold (step S3102: NO), the data setting process of the first special figure is executed (step S3104). In the data setting process of the first special figure, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure holding area 125 is moved to the execution area 127a for the first special figure. As a result, the target for starting this game round is the first special figure display unit 37a. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 125 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 125a and the second area 125b →. The data in each area shifts, such as the first area 125a, the third area 125c → the second area 125b, the fourth area 125d → the third area 125c. After that, the value of the first special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a first reduction command indicating that the first holding information in the first special figure holding area 125 has been reduced by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrementing command to the display side MPU 103, so that the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 can be obtained. Change the number display to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending information.

Here, when the process of step S3102 is executed, when the second hold information is held and stored, even if the first hold information is acquired at a timing earlier than the second hold information, the first hold information is obtained. 2 Hold information triggers the start of the game. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b over the execution of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a. As described above, it is more advantageous for the player that the second hold information is the start target of the game round than the first hold information is the start target of the game round. In this case, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are preferentially digested over the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, so that the second hold information, which is an advantageous side for the player, is prioritized. Then, it becomes possible to start the game round.

When the process of step S3103 or step S3104 is executed, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S3105). In the winning / failing determination process, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low probability winning / failing table is set to the main ROM83 regardless of whether the game round is started in the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability winning / failing table is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the game start target is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. .. After reading the pass / fail table, the pass / fail judgment is made from the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round. Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit / fail table.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S3106: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S3107). In the distribution determination process, when the start target of the current game round is the first hold information, the sort table for the first special figure is read from the main ROM 83, and the start target of the current game round is the second hold. If it is information, the distribution table for the second special figure is read from the main ROM 83. After reading the distribution table, distribution is performed from the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round. The information for determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read, and it is specified which type of jackpot result in the distribution table corresponds to the read numerical information.

After executing the distribution determination process, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process (step S3108). Specifically, if it corresponds to the 4R jackpot result, set "1" to the 4R jackpot flag, and if it corresponds to the 8R jackpot result, set "1" to the 8R jackpot flag, and set 16R. If it corresponds to the jackpot result, set "1" to the 16R jackpot flag. In the following description, the determination process of whether or not the result is various jackpots is performed by determining whether or not "1" is set in the corresponding flag of the main RAM 84. Further, the state in which "1" is set in step S3108 is cleared to "0" when the special electric power termination process is completed when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

After executing the flag set process for the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3109). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of this game, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the jackpot result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S3109, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S3108 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the jackpot results. The method of selecting the stop result for the jackpot result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of symbols are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is not the jackpot result (step S3106: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S3110). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result, and is common to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. It is one type of.

When the process of step S3109 or step S3110 is executed, the specific process of the variable display period is executed (step S3112). In the variable display period specifying process, the variable display period table is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the game times that are the target of this start correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, if the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach effect will occur. Further, even if the game times to be started this time do not correspond to the jackpot result, the game of this time out of the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure. When the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the side that is the start target of the round is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. When it is determined that the reach effect is generated, the variation display period table for reach generation stored in the main ROM 83 is read from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, it is stored in the main ROM 83. The variable display period table for non-reach generation is read from the main ROM 83. After that, the variable display period is determined by acquiring the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS and collating it with the already read variable display period table. Then, the information of the determined fluctuation display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main RAM 84.

After that, the current value set in the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is read out (step S3112). Then, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3113). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S3111, and the game times to be started are set to either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. Further, the variable command includes information on whether or not to execute the reach effect. If the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, the information that directly indicates whether or not to execute the reach effect is the change command. It may not be set to. Further, the variable command includes information indicating whether or not the current game state is in the high probability state, and the value of the game count counter grasped in step S3112, that is, the current game state is in the high probability state. If there is, information indicating the remaining number of continuations of the high probability state is included. The type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any type of jackpot result. Information indicating that is included.

After that, in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S3114). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3115). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is used for the special figure fluctuation processing. It becomes the corresponding "1".

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a table setting process in the present embodiment executed by the sound light side MPU 93. The table setting process is executed in step S901 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15).

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 82 (step S3201: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the result of the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment determined by the main MPU 82 at the start of this game round is specified, and the specified information is used on the sound light side. Write to RAM 95. After that, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S3203). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is a 16R jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result of this time. If the game result of the game round is a 4R jackpot result or an 8R jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result this time. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game time is a deviation result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the content of the change command. Then, when the reach effect occurs, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established and the combination of the reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, the information corresponding to the stop result in which both the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the reach symbols are not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After that, the effect lottery table reading process is executed (step S3204). In the reading process, the effect lottery table corresponding to the current situation is read from the sound / light side ROM 94. Then, the effect lottery process is executed (step S3205). In the effect lottery process, the numerical information of the effect lottery counter provided to be updated periodically in the sound / light side RAM 95 is read out, and the numerical information is collated with the effect lottery table read out in step S3204. Then, the type of production to be generated in this game is specified.

After that, the control table reading process corresponding to the execution content of the effect in the current game round is executed (step S3206). In the process, the information of the variation display period is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, the information of the variation display period, the information of the game result specified in the above step S3202, and the stop result in the above step S3203. The control table corresponding to the combination of the information of the above and the information of the result of the effect lottery process in step S3205 is read from the sound light side ROM 94 and written to the sound light side RAM 95. In the control table, the content of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 corresponding to the effect for the current game round and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 corresponding to the effect for the current game round are set. Therefore, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are performed according to the control table.

After that, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S3207). The variation pattern command includes information on the variation display period of the game times to be started, information indicating whether the game times to be started corresponds to the jackpot result or the miss result, and the start. Information indicating which of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b the target game times corresponds to, the information of the stop result determined in step S3203, and the information of the stop result. Information on the result of the effect lottery process in step S3205 is included. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display side MPU 103 starts the display control for executing the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41. In the table setting process, in addition to each of the above processes, other processes are executed in the same manner as in step S1009 in the first embodiment.

FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing a reading process of the effect lottery table in step S3204.

When the current game state is not a high probability state (step S3301: NO), or when the game result of the current game time is not a big hit result (step S3302: NO), the reading process of another effect lottery table is executed. (Step S3303). In the other production lottery table, a plurality of types of productions are set as productions for game rounds, and a production lottery is performed for each of the productions so that the selection probability of the multiple types of productions becomes a predetermined probability. The value of the counter is assigned. In detail, the other production lottery tables are set to a production lottery table for when reach occurs and a production lottery table for when reach does not occur. If this game time corresponds to the occurrence of reach effect, the effect lottery table for when reach occurs in another effect lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 94, and this game time corresponds to the occurrence of reach effect. If not, the effect lottery table for when reach does not occur in another effect lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 94. A plurality of types of reach effects are set in the effect lottery table for when a reach occurs, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects to be executed before the reach effect occurs are set. A plurality of types of advance notice effects are set in the effect lottery table for when reach does not occur. By reading the effect lottery table for when reach occurs, the type of reach effect and the type of advance notice effect that can be executed within the duration of the current game round are determined by lottery in the effect lottery process (step S3205). Will be done. By reading the effect lottery table for when reach does not occur, the type of advance notice effect that can be executed within the duration of the current game round is determined by the effect lottery process (step S3205).

In the reading process of the production lottery table, when the current game state is a high probability state (step S3301: YES) and the game result of this game time is a jackpot result (step S3302: YES), the variation received this time. Numerical information of the game count counter set in the command, that is, whether the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the current high probability state is grasped and the number of continuations of the remaining game times grasped is equal to or less than the branch reference number of times. It is determined whether or not (step S3304). The number of branching reference times is set to 30 times. Here, in the high probability state, the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process is 1/30. The number of branching reference times is the number of denominators of this jackpot probability. However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of branching reference times may be more than 30 times or less than 30 times.

When the remaining number of continuations of the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number (step S3304: YES), the first effect lottery table is read from the sound / light side ROM 94 (step S3305). Further, when the remaining number of continuations of the high probability state is larger than the number of branching reference times (step S3304: NO), the game result of this game time is the 16R jackpot result based on the information set in the type command received this time. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to (step S3306). When the 16R jackpot result is supported (step S3306: YES), the first effect lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 (step S3307), and when the 16R jackpot result is not supported (step S3306: NO), the first 2 The effect lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 (step S3308).

The first effect lottery table and the second effect lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52 (b). In the first production lottery table and the second production lottery table, a plurality of types of productions are set as productions for game rounds, and each production has a predetermined probability of selecting the plurality of types of productions. The value of the production lottery counter is assigned to each. Specifically, since the first production lottery table and the second production lottery table are production lottery tables that are selected only in the game times that result in a big hit, there are a plurality of types of the first production lottery table and the second production lottery table. The reach effect of is set, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects to be executed before the reach effect occurs are set. In this case, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the probability that the special effect is selected as the reach effect is set to 30% in the first effect lottery table, whereas in the second effect lottery table, the probability is set to 30%. The reach effects that can be selected do not include special effects. Further, the special effect is not included in the types of reach effects that can be selected in the other effect lottery tables read out in step S3303. Therefore, in the situation where the first production lottery table is read, the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number, and the game times or the high probability state that results in any big hit. The special effect is generated only in the game times in which the number of continuations of the remaining game times is larger than the branch reference number of times and the result of the 16R jackpot is obtained, and the special effect is not generated in other situations.

The timing at which the special effect is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d). FIG. 53 (a) shows the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state, FIG. 53 (b) shows the execution timing of the special effect, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 16R jackpot result. 53 (d) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode triggered by the 4R jackpot result or the 8R jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 53 (a), a special effect is generated as shown in FIG. 53 (b) at the timing of t1 before the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state becomes the branch reference number. As shown in FIG. 53 (c), a 16R jackpot result will occur. That is, when the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is larger than the number of branch reference times, a special effect can be generated on condition that a 16R jackpot result is generated. As a result, when a special effect occurs at a relatively early stage in a high probability state, it is determined that the most advantageous 16R jackpot result will occur, and the player who recognizes the occurrence of the special effect will be able to do so. You will be very satisfied with it.

On the other hand, in the situation where the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number, when a 4R jackpot result or an 8R jackpot result occurs as shown in the timing of t2, and as shown in the timing of t3. In any case where the 16R jackpot result occurs, a special effect can occur. In the pachinko machine 10, no matter which jackpot result occurs, a high probability state in which the end reference number of times is 80 times will occur after the end of the open / close execution mode. Then, when the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state decreases, the player wants a big hit result because any type can be used. In this case, if the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is less than or equal to the branch reference number of times, a special effect can occur regardless of the type of jackpot result. As a result, if a special effect occurs at a relatively late stage in a high probability state, it is confirmed that a jackpot result will occur, and the player who recognizes the occurrence of the special effect is greatly satisfied with that. It will be.

As a special effect, the timing during which the symbol display device 41 is executing the variable display of the symbol for the game round and the special symbol display units 37a and 37b are executing the variable display of the symbol. At a specific timing, the display light emitting unit 64 emits light in a special mode, a special sound is output from the speaker unit 65, and an effect of displaying a special character on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The timing and the content of the special production are arbitrary. For example, the special effect may be started at the timing when the game time is started, the special effect may be started before the reach effect is started in the game time, and the reach effect is started in the game time. The special production may be started after the production is performed. Further, a blower mechanism for blowing air from the front surface of the launch operation device 28 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 may be provided, and the blower mechanism may be used as a special effect to blow air.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is larger than the number of branching reference times, a special effect may occur provided that a 16R jackpot result is generated. As a result, when a special effect occurs at a relatively early stage in a high probability state, it is determined that the most advantageous 16R jackpot result will occur, and the player who recognizes the occurrence of the special effect will be able to do so. You will be very satisfied with it.

On the other hand, when the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state decreases, the player will want a big hit result because any type can be used. In this case, if the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is less than or equal to the branch reference number of times, a special effect can occur regardless of the type of jackpot result. As a result, if a special effect occurs at a relatively late stage in a high probability state, it is confirmed that a jackpot result will occur, and the player who recognizes the occurrence of the special effect is greatly satisfied with that. It will be.

<Another form of the fifth embodiment>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described fifth embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. By the way, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the fifth embodiment.

-If the 16R jackpot result occurs in a situation where the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is larger than the number of branching reference times, a special effect may be surely generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the special effect is executed in a situation where the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is larger than the number of branch reference times.

-It is not limited to the configuration in which the special effect is generated only in the game times in which the jackpot result occurs, and in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the game round is executed before the hold information. The special effect may be started in the situation where the game round is being executed with the pending information as the trigger. In this case, it is possible to secure a long period for executing the special effect. In this configuration, the jackpot result that can be the target of execution of the special effect depends on whether or not the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state at the timing when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired is larger than the branch reference number. The type may be changed, and the jackpot result that can be the execution target of the special effect depends on whether or not the number of continuations of the game times at the timing when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is actually executed is larger than the branch reference number. The type may be changed.

-In a situation where the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability state is greater than the number of branching reference times, the pending information corresponding to either the 8R jackpot result or the 16R jackpot result becomes the execution target of the special effect, and the remaining high-probability state remains. In a situation where the number of times the game is continued is equal to or less than the number of branching reference times, the hold information corresponding to the 16R jackpot result may be configured to be the execution target of the special effect.

-If three or more types of jackpot results that can be selected when the second hold information is the execution target of the hit / fail judgment process are set, the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is the branching criterion. In a situation where the number of times is greater than the number of times, a special effect can be executed in the game times corresponding to the jackpot results excluding the jackpot result of the type with the lowest advantage, while the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is the branch reference number of times. In the following situations, the special effect may be executed regardless of the game times corresponding to any jackpot result.

-Instead of the configuration in which the normal game state and the high probability state are set as the game state, the low frequency support state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode Is set, and when the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support state reaches the end reference number, the low-frequency support state is set, and a special effect as in the fifth embodiment is provided. The configuration to be performed may be applied.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration and game playability of the game area PA are different from those in the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA11 which is an region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PA11 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and above the variable display unit 36. The left region PA12, which is the left region, the right region PA13, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PA11, and the left region PA12 and the right region PA13, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided into a lower region PA14 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the launch operation device 28 as the first launch operation with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, the game ball is moved to the left of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA11. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA11 → the left side region PA12 → the lower region PA14. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the upper region PA11 is on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA11 → the right region PA13 → the lower region PA14. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA12 of the left side area PA12 and the right side area PA13, and the right side area. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA13. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum momentum, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA11 → the right region PA13 → the lower region PA14.

The lower region PA 14 is provided with a first operating port 33 as in the first embodiment. However, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment are not provided. Instead, in this embodiment, a special ball entry device 151 and a through gate 152 are provided. The configuration of the special ball entry device 151 is the same as that of the first special ball entry device 131 in the third embodiment. Therefore, the special ball entry device 151 can be switched between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. The special ball entry device 151 and the through gate 152 are provided in the right area PA13 of the game area PA. The special electric winning device 32 is also provided in the right area PA13. In this case, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA12 can win a prize in the first operating port 33, and cannot win a prize in the special ball winning device 151, the through gate 152, and the special electric winning device 32. The game ball flowing down the right area PA13 can win a prize in the special ball entry device 151, the through gate 152, and the special electric winning device 32, and cannot win a prize in the first operating port 33. The number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special ball entry device 151 is one, but the number of balls to be paid out may be two or more.

In the right region PA13, a special ball entry device 151 is provided below the through gate 152. The through gate 152 and the special ball entry device 151 are arranged so that the center in the lateral direction at each entrance of the game ball is on the same straight line in the vertical direction. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 152 in the vertical direction surely wins the special ball entry device 151 if the special ball entry device 151 is open, and if the special ball entry device 151 is closed. It flows down toward the special electric winning device 32.

The special ball entry device 151 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the first through gate 152. Specifically, when a prize is won in the through gate 152, the pending information on the general drawing side is acquired up to the upper limit of the number of stored numbers (specifically, 4). When the reserved information on the normal map side is stored, an internal lottery is performed, and the normal map display unit of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. A variable display of the pattern is performed at 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is won, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variation display is completed, the special ball entry device 151 is opened in a predetermined mode. A normal figure hold display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal figure display unit 38a, and the number of hold information on the normal figure side is displayed by lighting the normal figure hold display unit 38b. There is.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 33, the first hold information is reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 up to a maximum of four, and when a prize is generated in the special ball entry device 151. The second reserved information is reserved and stored in the second special figure reserved area 126 up to a maximum of four. In this case, the number of the first reserved information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is notified by the first special figure holding display unit 37c and is held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126. The number of the second reserved information is notified by the second special figure reserved display unit 37d.

The first special figure holding display unit 37c is provided in the upper frame portion 153 located above the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The first special figure reservation display unit 37c has the same number of light emitting units 154 as the upper limit number of the first reserved information that can be stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 so as to be arranged side by side. When one first hold information is held and stored in the first special figure hold area 125, one light emitting unit 154 at the left end is in a light emitting state and the other light emitting unit 154 is turned off, and the first When two first hold information is held and stored in the special figure hold area 125, the two light emitting units 154 from the left are in the light emitting state and the other light emitting parts 154 are turned off, and the first special figure When three first hold information is held and stored in the hold area 125, the three light emitting units 154 from the left are in the light emitting state and the other light emitting parts 154 are turned off, and the first special figure holding area When four first hold information is held and stored in 125, all the light emitting units 154 are in the light emitting state.

The second special figure holding display unit 37d is provided in the upper frame portion 153 located above the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The second special figure reservation display unit 37d has the same number of light emitting units 155 as the upper limit number of the second reserved information that can be stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 so as to be arranged side by side. When one second holding information is held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, one light emitting unit 155 at the left end is in a light emitting state and the other light emitting unit 155 is turned off, and the second When two second holding information are held and stored in the special drawing holding area 126, the two light emitting units 155 from the left are in the light emitting state and the other light emitting parts 155 are turned off, and the second special drawing When three second hold information is held and stored in the hold area 126, the three light emitting units 155 from the left are in the light emitting state and the other light emitting parts 155 are turned off, and the second special figure holding area When four second hold information is held and stored in 126, all the light emitting units 155 are in the light emitting state.

As the game state other than the open / close execution mode, a normal game state and a high probability state are set as in the first embodiment. In the normal game state, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. In the high probability state, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, in the low frequency support mode, the special ball entry device 151 is unlikely to be in the open state, and in the high frequency support mode, the special ball entry device 151 is likely to be in the open state.

Next, the contents of the pass / fail table in this embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d).

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d), a big hit result, a small hit result, and a missed result are set as the hit / miss result in the hit / miss table. Similar to the first embodiment, the jackpot result is a winning / failing result that can trigger a transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also trigger a transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a win / fail result that does not trigger a shift in both the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode, while it triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The deviation result is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As described above, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode regardless of whether the big hit result is obtained or the small hit result is obtained. However, the open / close execution mode executed when the big hit result is obtained and the small hit execution mode are used. The opening / closing mode of the special electric winning device 32 is different from that of the opening / closing execution mode executed when a hit result is obtained. Specifically, the open / close execution mode executed when a big hit result is obtained is a round number-specified mode executed up to a predetermined number of round games as in the first embodiment. As already explained, the round game is until a predetermined opening duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. It is a game that continues. In this case, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In, the opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, since the open duration of the round game is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, the upper limit is set to the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. It can be expected that more than the number of game balls will win. Further, the number of round games executed in the round number specified mode is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to one round regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

In the open / close execution mode executed when a small hit result is obtained, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls It is an open / close number regulation mode that is terminated based on the condition of either one of winning the special electric winning device 32 being satisfied. The opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close number regulation mode is longer than the firing cycle of the game balls (specifically, 0.6 seconds), and the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number (specifically, 10). It is set to a period for specifying the number of openings and closings, which is shorter than the product of. In the pachinko machine 10, since the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is set to one, the opening continuation period of one time is set to the opening / closing number regulation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing number specification mode is set to a plurality of times, the total period of the opening / closing continuation period of the plurality of times is specified as the above opening / closing number. The configuration may be set to the usage period. Specifically, the opening / closing number regulation period is set to 1.8 seconds. In the open / close execution mode executed when a small hit result is obtained, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player, although the number is smaller than the open / close execution mode executed when a big hit result is obtained.

As the pass / fail table, as shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d), the first special figure used for determining the pass / fail of the first hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. A pass / fail table for the second special figure and a pass / fail table for the second special figure used for determining the pass / fail of the second hold information stored in the execution area 127b for the second special figure are set. Further, the pass / fail table for the first special figure has a low accuracy table and a high accuracy table, and similarly, the pass / fail table for the second special figure also has a low accuracy table and a high accuracy table. There is a pass / fail table. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, different winning / failing tables are referred to in the first holding information and the second holding information, and in any case, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are used as the winning / losing lottery mode in the winning / failing determination. Existing.

Explaining each hit / fail table in detail, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the low probability / hit / fail table for the first special figure has two random numbers that result in a big hit (for example, “5” and “305”. "), And other than that, it is a random number value that results in a deviation. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the first reserved information, it may be either a big hit result or a missed result, but it is not a small hit result.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the number of random numbers resulting in the jackpot is set to be larger in the high probability / failure table for the first special figure than in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure. There are 20 pieces (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305". , "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. The values of other random numbers are the values of random numbers that result in deviation. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the first reserved information, either the jackpot result or the missed result is obtained, but the small hit result is not obtained.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as in the case of the low probability / failure table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the number of random numbers resulting in small hits is 40 (for example, "3", "8", "31", "37", "55", "68", "127", "133". , "160", "166", "189", "195", "217", "223", "242", "248", "273", "279", "302", "308", " 331, "337", "355", "368", "389", "395", "417", "423", "467", "473", "492", "498", "517" , "523", "555", "561", "572", "578", "596" "598"). The values of other random numbers are the values of random numbers that result in deviation. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the second reserved information, the result is either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a missed result.

As shown in FIG. 55 (d), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as that of the high accuracy table for the first special figure in the high accuracy table for the second special figure. Therefore, the number of random numbers that result in the jackpot is larger than that in the case of the low probability / rejection table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number that is the result of the small hit is the same as in the case of the low probability / rejection table for the second special figure. The values of other random numbers are the values of random numbers that result in deviation. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the second reserved information, the result is either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a missed result.

As described above, when the second hold information triggers a hit / fail judgment, a small hit result can be generated, so that a prize is generated in the special ball entry device 151, and the small hit result is supported. The open / close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, the player can slightly increase the number of balls held by the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and values of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result is obtained. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

In the present embodiment, when a big hit result occurs in the normal game state, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode according to the round number specified mode, and the game state becomes a high probability state after the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-probability state will surely continue until the jackpot result occurs 9 times thereafter. Then, when the jackpot result generated in the normal game state is the first time, if the jackpot result occurs 10 times, the probability state becomes high even after the end of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10th jackpot result. However, this high-probability state ends when four game rounds, which is the same number as four, which is the upper limit of the hold storage of the second hold information, are executed. If a jackpot result is obtained in a high-probability state that continues up to these four times, the game is played after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is completed, as in the case where the jackpot result occurs in the normal game state. The state becomes a high-probability state, and this high-probability state surely continues until the jackpot result occurs 9 times thereafter. In the high probability state, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as in the first embodiment, and in the normal gaming state, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the same as in the first embodiment. Becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a low-probability mode.

In the first embodiment, at least a part of the period during which the game times are executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least a part of the period during which the game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b. However, in the present embodiment, when the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times are performed in the other. It is a configuration that does not start. Further, in the situation where the open / close execution mode triggered by the game times in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is executed, the new game times are not started. In this way, when the game round is executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game round is not started in the other. In the symbol display device 41, the decoration area 43, the first hold display area 46, and the second hold display area 48 are arranged as shown in FIG. 5B in both the normal game state and the high probability state. On the other hand, the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 are not displayed. Then, regardless of whether the game times are executed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, the variation display of the symbol is displayed in the decorative area 43. Is executed.

Next, a processing configuration that enables the progress of the game as described above will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. In addition, in this embodiment, since the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are not executed in duplicate, the first embodiment is as described in the first embodiment. The 1 special figure special electric control process and the 2nd special figure special electric control process are not set individually, but the common special figure special electric control process is executed for both the 1st reserved information and the 2nd reserved information. ..

In the special figure special electric control process, first, the hold information acquisition process is executed (step S3401). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the pending information. When a prize has been generated in the first operating port 33 (step S3501: YES), and the number of first reserved information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S3502). : YES), the process for acquiring the first hold information is executed.

In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the main RAM 84 is provided in order for the main MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125. The value of the first special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S3503). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c corresponds to the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125.

After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservation storages added by 1 in step S3503 ( Step S3504). In this embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined by the content of the game state when the jackpot result is obtained, and the type of the jackpot result is not determined by the lottery. Therefore, the jackpot type counter C2 is provided. Not done. After that, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3505). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103 to display the number of first hold information in the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 and increase the number of holds. To change according to.

When a negative determination is made in step S3501, a negative determination is made in step S3502, or the process of step S3505 is executed, a prize is generated in the special ball entry device 151 (step S3506: YES), and further. When the number of the second reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 126 is less than the upper limit stored number (step S3507: YES), the process for acquiring the second reserved information is executed.

In the process for acquiring the second hold information, first, the main RAM 84 is provided in order for the main MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126. The value of the second special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S3508). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure reservation display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d corresponds to the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126.

After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservation storages added by 1 in step S3508 (. Step S3509). After that, the hold notification control process is executed (step S3510). Although the details of the hold notification control process will be described later, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time among the four light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is the second hold. A process for making the light emitting mode corresponding to the content of the information is executed.

After that, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3511). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display side MPU 103 to display the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 and increase the number of holds. To change according to.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 56), after executing the hold information acquisition process (step S3401), the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out (step S3402). In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set.

After reading the special figure special electric address table, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S3403), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S3404). ). Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed (step S3405), and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", the special figure is executed. The variable processing is executed (step S3406), and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure determination processing is executed (step S3407), and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3". If there is, the special electric power start process is executed (step S3408), if the value of the special figure special electric power counter is "4", the special electric power open processing is executed (step S3409), and the value of the special figure special electric power counter is ". If it is "5", the special electric power termination process is executed (step S3410). Of these processes, the processing contents of the special figure changing process in step S3406 and the special electric opening processing in step S3409 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start process of step S3405.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the second reserved information is held in the second special figure holding area 126 on condition that either the first reserved information or the second reserved information is held and stored (step S3601: YES). It is determined whether or not it is stored (step S3602). If the second hold information is held and stored (step S3602: YES), the data setting process of the second special figure is executed (step S3603).

In the data setting process of the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the execution area 127b for the second special figure. As a result, the target for starting this game round is the second special figure display unit 37b. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area 126a and the second area 126b →. The data in each area is shifted such that the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c, and so on. After that, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display unit 37d is changed to the content in which the second reservation information is reduced by one. That is, the state of each light emitting unit 155 in the second special figure holding display unit 37d is shifted to the left side by one. Therefore, when the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 is reduced from 4 to 3, the number of light emitting units 155 in the light emitting state is changed from 4 to 3. When the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 is reduced from 3 to 2, the number of light emitting units 155 in the light emitting state is reduced from 3 to 2. When the number is reduced to two and the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 is reduced from two to one, the number of light emitting units 155 in the light emitting state is two. The number is reduced from one to one, and one second hold information is held and stored in the second special figure hold area 126, and the second hold information is not held and stored in the second special figure hold area 126. In the case of, all the light emitting units 155 are in the extinguished state from the state in which one light emitting unit 155 is in the light emitting state. Further, in the data setting process, a second reduction command indicating that the second holding information in the second special figure holding area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display side MPU 103 to display the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 of the hold information. Change in response to the decrease in the number.

If the second hold information is not stored on hold (step S3602: NO), the data setting process of the first special figure is executed (step S3604). In the data setting process of the first special figure, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure holding area 125 is moved to the execution area 127a for the first special figure. As a result, the target for starting this game round is the first special figure display unit 37a. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 125 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 125a and the second area 125b →. The data in each area shifts, such as the first area 125a, the third area 125c → the second area 125b, the fourth area 125d → the third area 125c. After that, the value of the first special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c is changed to the content in which the first reservation information is reduced by one. That is, the state of each light emitting unit 154 in the first special figure holding display unit 37c is shifted to the left side by one. Therefore, when the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 is reduced from 4 to 3, the number of light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state is changed from 4 to 3. When the number of first hold information stored in the hold area 125 of the first special figure is reduced from three to two, the number of light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state is reduced from three. When the number is reduced to 2 and the number of 1st hold information stored in the 1st special figure hold area 125 is reduced from 2 to 1, the number of light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state is 2. The number is reduced from one to one, and one first hold information is held and stored in the first special figure hold area 125, and the first hold information is not held and stored in the first special figure hold area 125. In the case of, all the light emitting units 154 are in the extinguished state from the state in which one light emitting unit 154 is in the light emitting state. Further, in the data setting process, a first reduction command indicating that the first holding information in the first special figure holding area 125 has been reduced by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrementing command to the display side MPU 103, so that the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 can be obtained. Change the number display to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending information.

Here, by executing the process of step S3602, when the second hold information is held and stored, even if the first hold information is acquired at a timing earlier than the second hold information, the first hold information is obtained. 2 Hold information is the target for starting the game. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b over the execution of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a. As already explained, when the second hold information is the start target of the game round, a small hit result can occur, whereas when the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the small hit result can occur. Does not occur. Then, it is more advantageous for the player that the second hold information is the start target of the game round than the first hold information is the start target of the game round. In this case, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are preferentially digested over the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, so that the second hold information, which is an advantageous side for the player, is prioritized. Then, it becomes possible to start the game round.

When the process of step S3603 or step S3604 is executed, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S3605). In the winning / failing determination process, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the first special figure display unit 37a, the low probability winning / failing table for the first special figure (see FIG. 55 (a)) is displayed. Read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first special figure display unit 37a, the high probability winning / failing table for the first special figure (see FIG. 55 (b)). Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the second special drawing display unit 37b, the low probability winning / failing table for the second special figure (see FIG. 55 (c)). ) Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the second special drawing display unit 37b, the high probability winning / failing table for the second special figure (FIG. 55 (d)). (See) is read from the main ROM 83. After reading the pass / fail table, the pass / fail judgment is made from the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round. Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit / fail table. Further, when the start target of the game round this time is the second special figure display unit 37b, if it does not match the numerical information set as the big hit result, it is set as the small hit result in the above-mentioned hit / fail table. It is determined whether or not the information matches any of the numerical information provided.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result (step S3606: YES), "1" is set in the jackpot flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3607). After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3608). In the stop result setting process, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the game round, is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is read from the main side. Store in RAM 84.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is not a big hit result but a small hit result (step S3609: YES), "1" is set in the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3610). As already described, the small hit result does not occur on the first special figure display unit 37a side, but occurs only on the second special figure display unit 37b side. After that, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S3611). Specifically, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3609: NO), the stop result setting process for the miss result is executed (step S3612). Specifically, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is read out. Stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result, and further, the first It is one type common to the special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

When the process of step S3608, step S3611 or step S3612 is executed, the process for specifying the variable display period is executed (step S3613). In the variable display period specifying process, the variable display period table is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the game times that are the target of this start correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, if the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach effect will occur. Further, even if the game times to be started this time do not correspond to the jackpot result, the game of this time out of the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure. When the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the side that is the start target of the round is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. When it is determined that the reach effect is generated, the variation display period table for reach generation stored in the main ROM 83 is read from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, it is stored in the main ROM 83. The variable display period table for non-reach generation is read from the main ROM 83. After that, the variable display period is determined by acquiring the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS and collating it with the already read variable display period table. Then, the information of the determined fluctuation display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main RAM 84.

After that, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3614). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S3613, and the game times to be started are set to either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. Further, the variable command includes information on whether or not to execute the reach effect. If the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, the information that directly indicates whether or not to execute the reach effect is the change command. It may not be set to. In addition, the variable command includes information indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state. The type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result.

After that, in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S3615). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3616). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition by adding 1 is used for the special figure fluctuation processing. It becomes the corresponding "1".

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the process during special figure determination in step S3407 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 56).

In the special figure finalizing process, a lottery is performed on condition that the final stop period set in the special figure changing process in step S3406 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 56) has elapsed (step S3701: YES). The mode monitoring process is executed (step S3702). In the lottery mode monitoring process, the value of the game count counter is subtracted by 1 on condition that the value of the game count counter provided in the main RAM 84 is 1 or more, and the value of the game count counter after the subtraction is 1. When it is "0", the value of the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As described above, in the present embodiment, the high probability state is continued until the one set is completed with the result of 10 jackpots as one set, and the opening / closing execution mode based on the final jackpot result of one set is completed. Will be in a high probability state of continuing up to 4 game times. In this case, the game count counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of continuations of the remaining game rounds in the high probability state. Then, the value of the game count counter is decremented by 1 each time the game round is completed, and when the value of the game count counter after the deduction becomes "0", the value of the high probability flag is cleared to "0". By doing so, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the normal gaming state.

After executing the lottery mode monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result by determining whether or not the jackpot flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". (Step S3703). When it corresponds to the jackpot result (step S3703: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the continuation flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3704). The ongoing flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the set state in which the result of 10 jackpots is one set is ongoing. When "1" is not set in the ongoing flag (step S3704: NO), it means that the jackpot result of this time has occurred in the normal gaming state or in the high probability state of continuing up to four gaming times. In this case, the continuation flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3705), and the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "10" (step S3706). The continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining jackpot results that occur in the set state.

After that, the information of the first opening period (specifically, 20 seconds) corresponding to the jackpot result that triggers the start of the set state is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (step S3707). Then, the first opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3708). As a result, the effect corresponding to the start of the open / close execution mode and the start of the set state is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

When "1" is set in the ongoing flag (step S3704: YES), it means that the current jackpot result has occurred in the set state. In this case, the information of the second opening period (specifically, 10 seconds) corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result in the set state is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (step S3709). Then, the second opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3710). As a result, the effect corresponding to the start of the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result in the set state is the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit. It takes place at 65.

When "1" is not set in the jackpot flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3703: NO), this game is performed by determining whether or not "1" is set in the small hit flag of the main RAM 84. It is determined whether or not the times correspond to the small hit result (step S3711). When the small hit result is supported (step S3711: YES), the information of the second opening period (specifically, 10 seconds) corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result in the set state is provided by the special figure special electric timer. It is set in the counter (step S3712). Then, the second opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3713). As a result, the effect corresponding to the start of the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result in the set state is the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit. It takes place at 65.

When the processing of step S3708, step S3710 or step S3713 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3714). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric start processing (step S3408) by adding 1. ". On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S3711, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3715). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S3405).

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special electric start processing of step S3408 in the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 56).

When the opening period set in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 59) has elapsed (step S3801: YES), "1" is set in the value of the open / close count counter SOC provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3801: YES). Step S3802). The open / close count counter SOC is a counter for specifying the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened by the main MPU 82 in the open / close execution mode this time. In the present embodiment, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened is set to one in either the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result.

After that, the process of setting the maximum number of winnings is executed (step S3803). In the setting process, information corresponding to the maximum number of winnings is displayed in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 in either the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result (specifically). The target is set to "10"). Then, the opening continuation period setting process is executed (step S3804). In the setting process, if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, information on the opening duration for the jackpot (specifically, 29 seconds) is set, and if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result. Set the information on the open duration for small hits (specifically, 1.8 seconds). The open duration for big hits is set to be longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball (specifically 0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winnings, and the open duration for small hits is set for the game ball. The period is set shorter than the product of the firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winnings.

After that, the release setting process for the special electric power is executed (step S3805). In the open setting process, data is set so that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the special electric start processing is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4" corresponding to the special electric opening processing (step S3409) by adding 1. It becomes.

In the process during opening of the special electric power (step S3409), the special electric power winning device 32 is closed when the opening continuation period set this time has elapsed or when the number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 exceeds the upper limit winning number. Executes the processing of. Then, when the special electric winning device 32 is closed, the ending period is set in the special electric special electric timer counter, and the ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special electric power termination process of step S3410 in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 56).

When the ending period set in the special electric opening processing (step S3409) has elapsed (step S3901: YES), on condition that the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result (step S3902: YES). , Set "1" to the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3903). After that, the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3904), and when the value of the continuation counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S3905: YES), the continuation flag of the main RAM 84 is set. While clearing "0" (step S3906), "4" is set in the game count counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3907). As a result, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode this time, a high probability state is reached in which the game continues up to four game times. After that, the end processing of the special hold notification is executed (step S3908). In the termination process, the special hold notification flag described later in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0", the special notification target area described later in the second special figure hold area 126 is cleared to "0", and the second special figure hold display is further displayed. The light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state described later in the unit 37d is set to the normal light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S3902, a negative determination is made in step S3905, or the process of step S3908 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3909). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S3405).

Next, the hold notification control process executed in step S3510 in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 57) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62. The hold notification control process is executed when the second hold information is newly acquired, and is not executed even if the first hold information is newly acquired.

In the hold notification control process, it is determined whether or not the second hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a jackpot in a high probability state (step S4001). Specifically, among the second hold information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read, and the numerical information is referred to in the high probability state. High accuracy for the second special figure. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table.

When the acquired second hold information is hold information that results in a big hit in a high probability state (step S4001: YES), the second of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 acquired this time. 2 “1” is set in the jackpot hold flag provided in the area where the hold information is stored (step S4002). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot hold flag is set in each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 separately from the hit random number area and the reach random number area. However, unlike the first embodiment, the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are not provided with the jackpot type area, the duration area, and the set flag. Further, each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126 is specially notified as an area for the main MPU 82 to specify that the special holding notification is to be executed, which will be described later. The target area is provided. When the second hold information is the start target of the game round and the shift of the second hold information stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 is executed, the winning random number area , Not only the setting state of the reach random number area and the jackpot hold flag is shifted from the nth area to the n-1th area, but also the setting state of the special notification target area is shifted from the nth area to the n-1th area. ..

When a negative determination is made in step S4001 or when the process of step S4002 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the special hold notification flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4003). The special hold notification flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the light emitting state of any one of the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is the special light emitting state.

In the present embodiment, when the second hold information corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result is acquired in the set state in which the big hit result of 10 times is set, the light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is obtained. The light emitting state of the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information may be a special light emitting state. Specifically, the second hold information acquired in the situation where the second hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is When this is established, the leftmost light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the first second reserved information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in a blinking state as a special light emitting state. Further, the second hold information acquired in the situation where one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is set. If it is established, the second light emitting unit 155 from the left corresponding to the second second reserved information of the light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in a blinking state as a special light emitting state. In addition, the second hold information acquired in the situation where two second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is set. When this is established, the third light emitting unit 155 from the left corresponding to the third second reserved information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in a blinking state as a special light emitting state. In addition, the second hold information acquired in the situation where three second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is set. When this is established, the fourth light emitting unit 155 from the left corresponding to the fourth second reserved information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in a blinking state as a special light emitting state. Further, when the game rotation of the second special figure display unit 37b is newly started in the situation where any of the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure holding display unit 37d is in the special light emitting state, the special light emitting state is obtained. If the light emitting unit 155 is the leftmost light emitting unit 155, the special light emitting state is released, and the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state may be the second to fourth light emitting units 155 from the left. For example, the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state is shifted to the left by one. By confirming that any of the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in the special light emitting state, the second holding information corresponding to the order of the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state is obtained. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that a big hit result or a small hit result occurs. The special light emitting state is not limited to the configuration in which the light emitting unit 155 is in the blinking state. For example, the light emitting unit 155 may be lit in a color different from that in the normal light emitting state which is not the special light emitting state. ..

When "1" is set in the special hold notification flag (step S4003: YES), the process for newly starting the special hold notification after step S4004 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special hold notification from being executed at the same time in the plurality of light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d.

When "1" is not set in the special hold notification flag (step S4003: NO), the remaining jackpot result in the set state is determined by determining whether or not the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is 2 or more. It is determined whether or not the number of occurrences of is 2 or more (step S4004). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the jackpot hold flag corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result exists in the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time (step S4005). If the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists (step S4005: YES), the process for newly starting the special hold notification after step S4006 is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the remaining number of occurrences of the jackpot result is two or more in the set state, the game round is started before the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in which the special hold notification is executed. It is possible to prevent a jackpot result from occurring triggered by the second pending information.

When a negative determination is made in step S4005, it is determined whether or not the second hold information acquired this time is a big hit result or a small hit result in a high probability state (step S4006). Specifically, among the second reserved information acquired this time, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read, and the numerical information is referred to in the high probability state. High accuracy for the second special figure. It is determined whether or not it matches with any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table or any of the small hit results.

When the second hold information acquired this time corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result (step S4006: YES), the execution lottery process of the special hold notification is executed (step S4007). In the execution lottery process, the special hold notification table stored in advance in the main ROM 83 is read, and the numerical information of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 84 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the lottery counter matches the numerical information set in the special hold notification table. Execution of special hold notification If the winner is won (step S4008: YES), the special hold notification setting process is executed (step S4009). In the setting process, "1" is set in the special notification target area in the areas 126a to 126d in which the second reserved information acquired this time is stored among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126. At the same time, of the four light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d, the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is set to the special light emitting state. After that, "1" is set in the special hold notification flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4010), and the special hold notification command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S4011). By receiving the special hold notification command, the sound / light side MPU 93 causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect corresponding to the start of the special hold notification.

In the special light emitting state, the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result in the set state is until the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state becomes the start target of the game round. It is canceled when the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is started in the situation of once. In this case, a small hit result may occur triggered by the second hold information that is the target of starting the game round before the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emitting state in the set state. However, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to this small hit result, the special light emitting state in the light emitting unit 155 is continued. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the special light emitting state in the situation where the set state continues. In addition, when the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is started and the special light emission state is released in the situation where the remaining jackpot result in the set state is generated once, the light emission is in the special light emission state. The unit 155 switches to the normal light emitting state. This makes it possible to limit the execution period of the hold notification to the range of the set state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4004 that the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is not 2 or more, it is determined in step S4012 whether or not the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result is one in the set state. If a negative determination is made in step S4012, the hold notification control process is terminated as it is. This makes it possible to prevent the special light emitting state from being started in a situation other than the set state.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4012, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the jackpot hold flag corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result exists in the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time (step S4013). If a negative determination is made in step S4013, the processes after step S4006 already described are executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4013, the processes of steps S4009 to S4011 already described are executed on condition that the second hold information acquired this time corresponds to the jackpot result (step S4014). As a result, the light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is put into the special light emitting state.

That is, in the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result is one in the set state and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly added. If the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information that corresponds to the jackpot result that has already been acquired, the second hold information that corresponds to the newly acquired jackpot result is special. The light emitting state is started. As a result, a jackpot result is generated and the set state is terminated, triggered by the second hold information that is the start target of the game round before the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emitting state. In that case, the jackpot result will surely occur in the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special light emitting state is started in the situation where the remaining jackpot result is generated once in the set state. In the set state, the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is notified by the symbol display device 41, but the notification may not be executed.

Next, a state in which the hold notification is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (h). FIG. 63 (a) shows the execution period of the game round, FIG. 63 (b) shows the period during which the set state continues, and FIG. 63 (c) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result. FIG. 63 (d) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result, and FIG. 63 (e) shows the period in which the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is “1”. FIG. 63 (f) shows a period during which any of the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in the special light emitting state, and FIG. 63 (g) shows the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. 2 The period of holding and storing in the special figure holding area 126 is shown, and FIG. 63 (h) shows the timing when the second holding information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the game round corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result ends at the timing of t1, the set state is started as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and FIG. 63 (c) As shown in, the open / close execution mode is started triggered by the jackpot result. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at the timing of t2, which is the situation in which the open / close execution mode is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is held and stored for a period of time. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), of the light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d, the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is in the special light emitting state.

After that, at the timing of t3, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is terminated as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and a new game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). In this case, since this game round is triggered by the second hold information acquired at the timing of t2, the special light emitting state is released as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and as shown in FIG. 63 (g). The second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is not stored on hold.

After that, when the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a) at the timing of t4, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (c). Then, at the timing of t5, the opening / closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the game round is newly started as shown in FIG. 63 (a).

By acquiring the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result at the timing of t6, which is the situation in which the game round is being executed, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the second special figure hold display unit 37d Of the light emitting units 155, the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is in a special light emitting state. After that, as shown in FIG. 63A, the game round is started at the timing of t7, and the game round is started at the timing of t8 thereafter. Since the game round started at the timing of t8 is triggered by the second hold information acquired at the timing of t6, a small hit is shown at the timing of t9 when the game round ends, as shown in FIG. 63 (d). The open / close execution mode is started with the result as an opportunity.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at the timing of t10, which is the situation in which the open / close execution mode is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is held and stored for a period of time. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), of the light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d, the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is in the special light emitting state.

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is terminated, and the game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Also, the game round is started at the timing of t12. As shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired at the timing of t13, which is the situation in which the game round is being executed. However, at this point, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t10 is still held and stored, and the special light emission state is set for the second hold information. No special light emission state is set for the second hold information.

After that, at the timing of t14, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Since the game round is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). Then, the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t15. At the timing of t15, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). The game round is a game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t10. Therefore, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state does not exist in the second special figure holding display unit 37d. However, since the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t13 still exists, the period in which the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is held and stored is continued.

After that, when the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a) at the timing of t16, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (c). At the timing of t17, which is the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired as shown in FIG. 63 (h). However, at this point, since the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t13 is still stored on hold, the special light emitting state is not set for the second hold information acquired this time. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the game times corresponding to the jackpot results are started at the timing of t18 and the timing of t20, respectively, and at the timing of t19 and the timing of t21, respectively, in FIG. 63 (c). As shown, the open / close execution mode is started triggered by the jackpot result.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is "1", that is, the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result in the set state is one. At the timing of t22, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). As shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at the timing of t23, which is the situation in which the game round is being executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is held and stored. However, since the execution of the special hold notification was not won in the execution lottery process of the special hold notification, the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information.

After that, when the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a) at the timing of t24, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). As shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired at the timing of t25, which is the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. In this case, although the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is already reserved and stored as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the remaining jackpot result in the set state is shown in FIG. 63 (e). The number of occurrences is one. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emitting unit 155 of the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t25 is in the special light emitting state.

After that, at the timing of t26, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is terminated as shown in FIG. 63 (d), and the game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Further, at the timing of t27, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). The game round ends at the timing of t28, and at the timing of t28, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (c). Then, the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t29. As a result, the open / close execution mode corresponding to the final jackpot result in the set state ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the current set state ends. Further, at the timing of t29, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the special light emitting state for the second hold information ends.

Further, at the timing of t29, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). The game round is a game round triggered by the second hold information acquired at the timing of t25. After that, at the timing of t30, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is set from the timing of t30 to the timing of t31. Will be executed.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the jackpot result does not occur triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the game times before the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emission state, the execution target of the special light emission state While the big hit result or the small hit result is given with the second hold information as the trigger, the game round is executed before the second hold information which is the execution target of the special light emitting state. When a jackpot result is generated triggered by the second hold information, the jackpot result is given triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emitting state. As a result, when the special light emitting state occurs, the player takes the opportunity of the second holding information that is the execution target of the game times before the second holding information that is the execution target of the special light emitting state. It is expected that the jackpot result will be given, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the jackpot result does not occur triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the game round before the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emitting state, the jackpot result or the small hit Since the result is given, even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the second hold information, which is the execution target of the special light emitting state, from being lowered.

In the situation where the remaining jackpot results occur once in the set state and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot results has already been acquired, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot results is newly acquired. If so, the special light emission state is set for the second hold information corresponding to the newly acquired jackpot result if the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information corresponding to the already acquired jackpot result. Is started. As a result, a jackpot result is generated and the set state is terminated, triggered by the second hold information that is the start target of the game round before the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emitting state. In that case, the jackpot result will surely occur in the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special light emitting state is started in the situation where the remaining jackpot result is generated once in the set state.

In the situation where the remaining jackpot results are generated twice or more in the set state, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or the small hit result is already acquired in the situation where the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired. Is newly acquired, the special light emitting state is not set for the newly acquired second hold information. As a result, the situation in which a jackpot result event occurs triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the game round before the second hold information that is in the special light emitting state remains in the set state. It is possible to limit the number of times the jackpot result occurs to one. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the situation in which the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result is one in the set state.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described sixth embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. By the way, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the sixth embodiment.

-The opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is not limited to the configuration in which the round game is executed only once, and the round game may be executed twice or more. In this case, it is possible to further enhance the advantage of the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result over the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result.

-Although the configuration is such that the special light emitting states do not occur at the same time in the plurality of light emitting units 155, instead of this, the configuration may be such that the special light emitting states may occur at the same time in the plurality of light emitting units 155. In this case, if the second hold information to be executed first of the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state corresponds to the jackpot result, the game turn is performed later. By configuring the second hold information to be executed to correspond to the jackpot result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the plurality of light emitting units 155 are simultaneously in the special light emitting state.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the special hold notification is executed in the second special figure hold display unit 37d, the special hold notification may be executed in the symbol display device 41. For example, in a configuration in which the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved information is displayed on the symbol display device 41, a special hold notification may be executed according to the contents of the reserved display images.

-If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, the special hold notification dedicated to that may be executed. As a result, it is confirmed that a plurality of jackpot results will be generated when the special hold notification is executed, so that the player's attention to whether or not the special hold notification is executed should be increased. Is possible.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of each of the above embodiments. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other (for example, a combination of the first embodiment and the fifth embodiment, a second embodiment, a fourth embodiment, and a sixth embodiment). Combination of embodiments), the configurations of each of the above embodiments may be combined with each other, and the following configurations of other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination.

-Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 101 is controlled by the voice emission control device 91 based on the command output from the main control device 71, the display control device 101 is based on the command output from the main control device 71. May be configured to control the voice emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 71, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 71. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 91 and the configuration of the command output from the voice emission control device 91 to the display control device 101 are also arbitrary.

-The device on which the effect for the game round is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the game round is executed by the operation of the movable decorative member. Often, the effect for game rounds may be executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or the effect for game rounds may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above aspects.

-When a pachinko machine of another type different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate big hits when rights are generated, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
Starting ball entry portions (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Special information acquisition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S504 and S604 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S705 to S709 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and
The privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (step S1204 in the main MPU 82) based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. ~ Function to execute the process of step S1208) and
The game rounding operation is started, and the game rounding operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, so that the game rounding operation is performed in each game round. Game times control means (function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process in the main MPU 82)
In a game machine equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (second operating port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The grant determination means makes the grant determination with respect to the first special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry portion, and the grant determination means performs the grant determination on the second start ball entry portion. Is configured to make the above-mentioned grant determination for the second special information acquired based on the entry of the ball.
The game time control means has at least a part of the period during which the game times triggered by the first special information are executed and at least one of the periods during which the game times triggered by the second special information are executed. It is a configuration that can overlap with the part,
When the game machine acquires the first correspondence information which is the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information and acquires the second correspondence information which is the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information. In the adjustment means (at the time of acquisition by the main MPU 82), the relationship between the execution timings of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information becomes a predetermined relationship. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function to execute setting processing.

According to the feature A1, since the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game times. It becomes. In this case, when the first correspondence information which is the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired and the second correspondence information which is the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired, the first correspondence information The relationship between the execution timings of the game times triggered by the above and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information becomes a predetermined relationship. As a result, each of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information will occur according to a certain rule, and the relative execution timing of each game time is preferable. It becomes possible.

Feature A2. By adjusting the duration of the game times, the adjusting means has a predetermined relationship between the execution timings of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature A1, which is characterized in that it becomes.

According to the feature A2, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described in the feature A1 only by adjusting the duration of the game times.

Feature A3. The adjusting means is a game time triggered by the first special information, which is started before the game time triggered by the first correspondence information, and a game time triggered by the second special information. By adjusting the duration of at least one of the game times, which is a game time and is started earlier than the game time triggered by the second correspondence information, the first correspondence information is used as an opportunity. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the relationship between the execution timing of the game times and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information becomes a predetermined relationship.

According to the feature A3, the duration of the game times started before the game times triggered by the first correspondence information or the game times started before the game times triggered by the second correspondence information is adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the relationship between the execution timings of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information to become a predetermined relationship.

Feature A4. The adjusting means executes the game times when the first special information that triggers the execution of the game times corresponds to the granted correspondence information before the first correspondence information and before the second correspondence information. Execution of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information in at least one of the cases where the second special information as an opportunity corresponds to the grant correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that a predetermined process for making the timing relationship a predetermined relationship is not executed.

According to the feature A4, when the first correspondence information is acquired in the situation where the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has already been acquired, or the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has already been acquired. If the second correspondence information is acquired in such a situation, the adjustment by the adjustment means is not executed. As a result, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described in the above feature A1 while not affecting the execution timing of other special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information.

Feature A5. Multiple types of the above-mentioned grant correspondence information are set,
The adjusting means makes the predetermined relationship different depending on at least one of the type of the given correspondence information corresponding to the first correspondence information and the kind of the grant correspondence information corresponding to the second correspondence information. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to the feature A5, the execution timing of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information according to at least one of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information. Relationship is changed. As a result, it is possible to make the relative execution timing of each game time preferable according to the type of corresponding information.

Feature A6. The first special information and the first special information and the first special information in a situation where a game is executed triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, which is one of the first special information and the second special information. 2 When the game round triggered by the other special information of the special information is started, the means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the grant correspondence information (execution of the process of step S704 in the main MPU 82). With the function to
As the grant correspondence information, the first grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege having a relatively high advantage of the player and the second grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege having a relatively low advantage of the player And are set,
When the first correspondence information corresponds to the first grant correspondence information and the second correspondence information corresponds to the second grant correspondence information, the adjusting means is triggered by the first correspondence information. A feature characterized in that the relationship between the execution timings of these game times is a predetermined relationship so that the game times can be started triggered by the second correspondence information in the situation where the game times are being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A5.

According to the feature A6, the second special corresponding to the second grant correspondence information having a relatively low advantage due to the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first grant correspondence information having a relatively high advantage. It is possible to invalidate the game times triggered by the information.

Feature A7. The first special information and the first special information and the first special information in a situation where a game is executed triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, which is one of the first special information and the second special information. 2 When the game round triggered by the other special information of the special information is started, the means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the grant correspondence information (execution of the process of step S704 in the main MPU 82). With the function to
As the grant correspondence information, the first grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege having a relatively high advantage of the player and the second grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege having a relatively low advantage of the player And are set,
When the first correspondence information corresponds to the first grant correspondence information and the second correspondence information corresponds to the first grant correspondence information, the adjusting means is triggered by one of the correspondence information. Features A1 to A6, characterized in that the relationship between the execution timings of these game times is a predetermined relationship so that the game times triggered by the other are not started in the situation where the game times are executed. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A7, the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first grant correspondence information having a relatively high advantage and the second special corresponding to the first grant correspondence information having a relatively high advantage It is possible to prevent one of the information-triggered game times from being invalidated by the other.

Feature A8. The adjusting means
The first correspondence information has been acquired for the duration of the game round that is triggered by the first special information and is started earlier than the game round triggered by the first correspondence information. A first adjusting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1302 to S1308 in the main MPU 82) for executing the first adjusting process for adjusting based on the above.
The second correspondence information has been acquired for the duration of the game round that is triggered by the second special information and is started earlier than the game round triggered by the second correspondence information. A second adjusting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1309 to S1315 in the main MPU 82) for executing the second adjusting process for adjusting based on the control.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that

According to the feature A8, the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information is adjusted based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information, and the second special is based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information. The duration of the game is adjusted based on the information. As a result, compared to the configuration in which only the duration of one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is adjusted, the game triggered by the first correspondence information It becomes easy to make adjustments so that the relationship between the execution timings of the times and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information becomes a predetermined relationship.

Feature A9. The first adjustment means executes the first adjustment process based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information regardless of whether or not the second correspondence information is acquired.
The second adjusting means is characterized in that the second adjusting process is executed based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information regardless of whether or not the first correspondence information is acquired. The game machine described in.

According to the feature A9, the first adjustment process is executed regardless of whether or not the second correspondence information is acquired based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information, and the first correspondence is executed based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information. Since the second adjustment process is executed regardless of whether or not the information is acquired, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the execution trigger of each adjustment process.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the configurations of the features A1 to A9. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
Starting ball entry portions (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Special information acquisition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1904 and S2003 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and
The first privilege granting means (main side) that grants the first privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. (Function to execute the process of step S2307 in MPU82) and
The game rotation operation is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, so that the game rotation operation is performed in each game rotation. Game times control means (function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process in the main MPU 82)
A transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2503 and S2504 in the main MPU 82) for shifting to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, and
After the number of executions of the game times reaches the end reference number in the advantageous game state, the end means (function of executing the process of steps S2302 to S2305 in the main MPU 82) to end the advantageous game state,
Special notification control so that the special notification corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information acquired by the special information acquisition means is executed at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. Means (a function to execute a hold command selection process on the main MPU 82, a function to execute a hold command correspondence process on the display MPU 103),
With
The special notification control means determines the number of triggers, which is one of the number of game times executed in the advantageous game state and the number of remaining game times required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes content adjusting means (a function of executing the process of step S2707 in the main MPU 82) that makes the execution content of the special notification different as at least one determination criterion.

According to the feature B1, even if the player shifts to the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state ends when the number of times the game is executed reaches the end reference number in the advantageous game state. As a result, in the advantageous gaming state, the game is performed while being aware of the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the special notification corresponding to the content of the special information is executed at a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. As a result, the player can predict the content of the special information even before the game round triggered by the special information is started. Furthermore, the execution content of the special notification is different with at least one criterion for the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, the content of the special notification can be associated with the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state, and the degree of attention to the special notification can be increased.

Feature B2. The grant determination means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is relatively high or low as the determination mode. And
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the high probability mode.

According to the feature B2, even if the mode shifts to the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode ends when the number of times the game is executed reaches the end reference number in the high-probability mode. As a result, in the high-probability mode, the game is performed while being aware of the remaining number of continuations of the high-probability mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the special notification corresponding to the content of the special information is executed at a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. As a result, the player can predict the content of the special information even before the game round triggered by the special information is started. Furthermore, the execution content of the special notification is different with the remaining number of continuations of the high probability mode as at least one criterion. As a result, the content of the special notification can be associated with the remaining number of continuations of the high probability mode, and the degree of attention to the special notification can be increased.

Feature B3. The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (second operating port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The grant determination means makes the grant determination on the first special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry portion, and the grant determination means performs the grant determination on the second start ball entry portion. Is configured to make the above-mentioned grant determination for the second special information acquired based on the entry of the ball.
The special notification control means is based on the acquisition of at least one of the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information and the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information. It is intended to execute special notification,
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the content adjusting means changes the execution content of the special notification according to the number of triggers at the timing when the trigger information is acquired.

According to the feature B3, in the configuration in which the first special information and the second special information are individually acquired, the special notification is triggered by the acquisition of the first special information or the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information. Is started and the special notification is executed in a state associated with the remaining number of continuations in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the special notification is executed, the first special is within the range of the remaining number of continuations in the high probability mode. It is possible to make the player recognize which of the game times triggered by the information and the game times triggered by the second special information should be digested.

Feature B4. In the advantageous gaming state, the priority means for making the game times triggered by the second special information easier to be digested than the game times triggered by the first special information (specific processing of the variable display period in the main MPU 82). Function to execute) and
The game according to feature B3, wherein the content adjusting means changes the execution content of the special notification according to the number of triggers at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired. Machine.

According to the feature B4, in the advantageous game state, the game times triggered by the second special information are more easily digested than the game times triggered by the first special information. Therefore, in the advantageous game state, the second special information A lot of game times will be executed. In this case, the special notification is executed when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired, and the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired. The execution contents of the special notification will be different due to the above. As a result, the situation in which the game times triggered by the second special information are preferentially digested should be continued as it is, or the game times triggered by the second special information are prevented from being executed and the assigned correspondence information is dealt with. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game round should be executed triggered by the first special information.

Feature B5. Second privilege granting means for granting the second privilege to the player when the second special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information at least in the advantageous gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the main MPU 82). The gaming machine according to the feature B4, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature B5, in a configuration in which many game times are executed triggered by the second special information in an advantageous gaming state, even if the second special information does not correspond to the assigned correspondence information, it corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information. As a result, the player is given the second privilege. In this case, it is advantageous for the player to execute many game times triggered by the second special information in the advantageous game state. On the other hand, when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired in the advantageous gaming state, it is advantageous for the player to execute the game times triggered by the first special information in the advantageous gaming state. It becomes. In this case, the special notification is executed when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired, and the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired. Because the execution content of the special notification is different due to the above, the game rotation triggered by any special information is executed within the range of the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state through the execution content of the special notification. It becomes possible to make the player recognize whether it should be.

Feature B6. The game time control means has at least a part of the period during which the game times triggered by the first special information are executed and at least one of the periods during which the game times triggered by the second special information are executed. It is a configuration that can overlap with the part,
The priority means is that the game time triggered by the second special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state is more than the game time triggered by the first special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information. The game machine according to the feature B4 or B5, wherein the duration of the game is shortened.

According to feature B6, since the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information are executed in duplicate, the number of times the game times are executed per unit time should be increased. Is possible. In addition, in the advantageous game state, the duration of the game times is longer in the game times triggered by the second special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information than in the game times triggered by the first special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information. Since it is shortened, the game times triggered by the second special information are easily digested in the advantageous game state. Further, even if the game times triggered by the second special information are easily digested in the advantageous game state as described above, the game times and the second special information triggered by the first special information are triggered as described above. Since the game times are executed in duplicate with the above-mentioned game times, the game times triggered by the first special information are also executed in the advantageous game state. In this case, the special notification is executed when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired, and the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired. Because the execution contents of the special notification are different due to the above, the player should determine which special information should be used as the trigger for the game to be executed within the range of the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous game state. Can be recognized by.

Feature B7. The content adjusting means is
Regardless of the number of times the game is executed with the second special information as the trigger, the number of triggers at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is acquired is the first special. When the number of game times triggered by the information is the number of times that can be started in the current advantageous game state, the first content adjusting means (step S2712 in the main MPU 82) so that the first special notification is executed as the special notification. (Function to execute the process of step S2807 in the display side MPU 103) and
When the number of triggers at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times the game is executed triggered by the second special information, the first special When the game number triggered by the information is the number of times that cannot be started in the current advantageous game state, the second content adjusting means (step S2710 in the main MPU 82) so that the second special notification is executed as the special notification. (Function to execute the process of step S2804 in the display side MPU 103) and
The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that

According to the feature B7, when the first special notification is executed, the game round triggered by the second special information is started before the game round triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is started. It enables the player to recognize that as much as possible should be digested. On the other hand, when the second special notification is executed, the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information are executed in the advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the number of executions should be adjusted. This makes it possible to change the mode of launching the game ball according to the content of the special notification.

Feature B8. The first content adjusting means makes it possible for the player to recognize that the firing operation aiming at the acquisition of the second special information should be continued as the first special notification.
As the second special notification, the second content adjusting means is triggered by the second special information for starting a game round triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the high probability state. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein a notification is executed so that the player can recognize the maximum number of times the game has been executed.

According to the feature B8, the player who confirmed the first special notification will continue the firing operation aiming at the acquisition of the second special information, and the player who confirmed the second special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. The number of executions of the game times triggered by the second special information is adjusted so that the game times triggered by the first special information are executed in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, the importance of the special notification can be increased, and the degree of attention to the special notification can be increased.

Feature B9. The grant correspondence information includes the first grant correspondence information in which the gaming state after the grant of the first privilege is the advantageous gaming state, and the second grant state in which the gaming state after the grant of the first privilege is not the advantageous gaming state. The grant correspondence information and is set,
In the first content adjusting means, the number of triggers at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired is the number of times the game is executed with the second special information as the trigger. Even if there is, when the number of times the game times triggered by the first special information can be started in the current advantageous game state, and when the first special information corresponds to the first grant correspondence information. Is characterized in that the first special notification is not executed, and when the first special information corresponds to the second grant correspondence information, the first special notification is executed. The gaming machine according to B7 or B8.

According to the feature B9, when the first special information corresponds to the second grant correspondence information, the first special notification is executed. As a result, when the advantageous gaming state cannot be continued, the game times triggered by the second special information should be digested as much as possible so that more profits will be given to the player until then. Can be encouraged to the player. On the other hand, when the first special information corresponds to the first grant correspondence information, the first special notification is not executed. As a result, due to the fact that many game times triggered by the second special information have been digested, the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first grant correspondence information will not be executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence from being triggered by the execution of the first special notification.

Feature B10. In the second content adjusting means, the number of triggers at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of executions of the game times triggered by the second special information. In some cases, if the number of times the game round triggered by the first special information cannot be started in the current advantageous gaming state, the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state. If so, the second special notification is executed, and if the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information even in a gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state, the second special information is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B9, wherein the notification is prevented from being executed.

According to the feature B10, when the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state, the second special notification is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the first special information should be used as an opportunity to execute the game times in the advantageous game state. On the other hand, even if the first special information is not in the advantageous gaming state, if it corresponds to the grant correspondence information, it is assumed that the first special information triggers the execution of the game after the end of the advantageous gaming state. Will also be granted the first benefit. In this case, the first special information does not need to be executed in the current advantageous gaming state. Therefore, in such a situation, by preventing the second special notification from being executed, the necessity of execution is low. It is possible to prevent the second special notification from being executed.

Feature B11. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Open / close control means (execution of special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, special electric closing processing, and small hit processing in the main MPU 82) that executes opening / closing control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state. Function to do) and
With
The first privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control means is executed as the granting of the first privilege, and the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is the said. It is possible to make the game state different from the game state before the start of the specific game state.
When the second special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information at least in the advantageous gaming state, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state in which the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control means is executed. The game state after the end of the predetermined game state is provided with a means for maintaining the game state before the opening / closing control is executed (a function of executing the processes of steps S2309 and S2601 to S2611 in the main MPU 82).
The game turn control means is any one of features B4 to B10, characterized in that the game turn is not executed in the specific game state, while the game turn can be executed in the predetermined game state. The game machine described in.

According to the feature B11, by preventing the game times from being executed in the specific game state, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific game state when the specific game state is executed. On the other hand, by making it possible to execute the game times in the predetermined game state, it is possible to increase the digestibility of the game times.

Feature B12. When the game round triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is being executed and the game round triggered by the second special information is started, the second special information is given. The gaming machine according to feature B11, which comprises means for preventing the information from being treated as correspondence information (a function of executing the process of step S2104 in the main MPU 82).

According to the feature B12, it is possible to prevent the specific gaming state from being duplicated by the second special information in the situation where the specific gaming state is executed triggered by the first special information. ..

Feature B13. In a situation where the game round triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is being executed and a situation in which the predetermined gaming state is being executed, the game round triggered by the first special information is started. If so, the gaming machine according to feature B11 or B12, wherein the first special information has a configuration that can be treated as the grant correspondence information.

According to the feature B13, because the first special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is in the predetermined gaming state or the game round is executed triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information. It is possible to prevent the information from not being treated as grant correspondence information.

Feature B14. At least the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information corresponding to the given correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state is triggered by at least the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B11 to B13, which is set to a period equal to or longer than the total period of the duration of the game times and the execution period of the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature B14, the game times triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information or the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the given correspondence information in the situation where the predetermined game state is executed. Even if is started, the game round triggered by the first special information will end after the predetermined game state is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined gaming state and the specific gaming state from being executed in duplicate.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the configurations of the features B1 to B14. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
Starting ball entry portions (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Open / close control means (execution of special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, special electric closing processing, and small hit processing in the main MPU 82) that executes opening / closing control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state. Function to do) and
Special information acquisition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1904 and S2003 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion, and
Grant determination means (function of executing the process of steps S2105 to S2109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and
The game rotation operation is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, so that the game rotation operation is performed in each game rotation. Game times control means (function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process in the main MPU 82)
Based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, the opening / closing by the opening / closing control means is performed after the game rotation operation is completed. Specific transition means (a function of executing the process of step S2307 in the main MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state in which control is executed, and
Based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result, it is possible to set the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state to a gaming state different from the gaming state before the start of the specific gaming state. Changing means (function to execute the process of steps S2502 to S2506 in the main MPU 82),
Even if the result of the grant determination is not the result of the grant correspondence, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the game shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the open / close control by the open / close control means is executed, and the predetermined The game state after the end of the game state is maintained in the game state before the predetermined game state is executed (a function of executing the processes of steps S2309 and S2601 to S2611 in the main MPU 82).
With
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (second operating port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The grant determination means makes the grant determination on the first special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry portion, and the grant determination means performs the grant determination on the second start ball entry portion. Is configured to make the above-mentioned grant determination for the second special information acquired based on the entry of the ball.
The game time control means has a configuration capable of overlapping the period in which the game time triggered by the first special information is executed and the period in which the game time triggered by the second special information is executed. Yes,
In the predetermined gaming state generated by the special information of one of the first special information and the second special information, the game triggered by the other special information of the first special information and the second special information. A gaming machine characterized in that the times can be executed.

According to the feature C1, in the predetermined gaming state triggered by one of the first special information and the second special information, the game round triggered by the other of the first special information and the second special information can be executed. .. As a result, it is possible to increase the digestibility of the game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The grant determination means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is relatively high or low as the determination mode. And
The changing means can change the determination mode after the end of the specific gaming state to a mode different from that before the start of the specific gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the specific setting means maintains the determination mode after the end of the predetermined gaming state to the mode before the predetermined gaming state is executed.

According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which the determination mode can be changed when the specific gaming state is executed and the determination mode is not changed when the predetermined gaming state is executed, the excellent effect as described above can be obtained. It becomes possible to play.

Feature C3. In the specific game state triggered by one of the first special information and the second special information, the game turn control means is triggered by the other special information of the first special information and the second special information. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, which is characterized in that the above-mentioned game times are not executed.

According to the feature C3, by preventing the game times from being executed in the specific game state, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific game state when the specific game state is executed.

Feature C4. The first special information and the first special information and the first special information in a situation where a game is executed triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, which is one of the first special information and the second special information. 2 When the game round triggered by the other special information of the special information is started, the means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the grant correspondence information (execution of the process of step S2104 in the main MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the feature C4, in the situation where the specific gaming state is executed triggered by the special information of one of the first special information and the second special information, the other special information of the first special information and the second special information is executed. It is possible to prevent the specific game states from being duplicated.

Feature C5. Either the situation in which the game times corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition are executed or the situation in which the predetermined game state is executed, triggered by the special information of one of the first special information and the second special information. In one situation, when the game round is started triggered by the other special information of the first special information and the second special information, the other special information can be treated as the grant correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to the feature C5, the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is given as the grant correspondence information because the game round is executed or the special game state is in the predetermined game state triggered by the special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information. It is possible to prevent it from being unhandled.

Feature C6. The duration of the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is the duration of the game times triggered by the second special information corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition and the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, which is set to a period equal to or longer than the total period with the execution period of.

According to the feature C6, the game times triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information or the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the given correspondence information in the situation where the predetermined game state is executed. Even if is started, the game round triggered by the first special information will end after the predetermined game state is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined gaming state and the specific gaming state from being executed in duplicate.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the configurations of the features C1 to C6. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Execution of the first effect so that the predetermined effect can be executed when the first profit is given in the first situation, and the predetermined effect is not executed when the first profit is not given in the first situation. Means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3304 and S3306 to S3308 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps S4009 to S4014 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) When,
In the second situation, the second effect executing means (in the fifth embodiment) that enables the predetermined effect to be executed in both the case where the first profit is given and the case where the second profit is given. A function of executing the processes of steps S3304 and S3305 in the sound-light side MPU 93, and a function of executing the processes of steps S4004 to S4011 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment).
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, when the predetermined effect occurs in the first situation, the grant of the first profit is confirmed, and when the predetermined effect occurs in the second situation, the first profit or the second profit is given. .. As a result, even if the predetermined effect is the same, the content of the profit suggested by the predetermined effect differs between the first situation and the second situation, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the predetermined effect. Become. In addition, the player who expects to give the first profit will be greatly satisfied with the occurrence of the predetermined effect by the occurrence of the predetermined effect in the first situation, and when the predetermined effect occurs in the second situation, the first 1 It is expected that it corresponds to the granting of profits. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the first profit is more advantageous to the player than the second profit.

According to the feature D2, the player expects that the first profit is given. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature D1, the occurrence of the predetermined effect in the first situation is greatly satisfied, and when the predetermined effect occurs in the second situation, the predetermined effect is generated. It is expected that it corresponds to the granting of the first profit.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein a part of the situation of the specific period corresponds to the first situation, and a part of the situation of the specific period corresponds to the second situation. ..

According to the feature D3, the content of the profit suggested by the occurrence of the predetermined effect is different even within the range of the specific period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a specific period.

Feature D4. Special information acquisition means (a function to execute the acquisition process of pending information in the main MPU 82) to acquire special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3105 to S3109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and
The first profit is given to the player based on the result of the grant determination being the first correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the first information among the grant correspondence information, and the said Benefit granting means for granting the second benefit to the player based on the result of the grant determination being the second correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the second information in the grant correspondence information. (Function to execute the processes of steps S3006 to S3008 in the main MPU 82) and
The game rotation operation is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, so that the game rotation operation is performed in each game rotation. Game times control means (function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process in the main MPU 82)
A transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 82) for shifting to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, and
After the number of executions of the game times reaches the end reference number in the advantageous game state, the end means for ending the advantageous game state (the function of executing the processes of steps S3002 to S3005 in the main MPU 82) and
With
The first situation is a situation in which the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number of times in the advantageous game state is within a predetermined number of times range.
The second situation is described in any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number of times in the advantageous game state is within a specific number of times range. Game machine.

According to the feature D4, the content of the profit suggested by the occurrence of the predetermined effect is different in relation to the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, attention is paid to the predetermined production in relation to the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D5. The first profit is more advantageous to the player than the second profit.
The first situation is a situation in which the number of remaining games required to reach the end reference number of times in the advantageous game state is equal to or more than a predetermined reference number of times.
The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the second situation is a situation in which the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous gaming state is less than the predetermined reference number.

According to the feature D5, when the predetermined effect occurs in the situation where the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit is confirmed, and the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state is determined. If a predetermined effect occurs in a situation where is less than the predetermined reference number of times, the first profit or the second profit will be given. In this case, if the predetermined effect is generated before the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state reaches the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit having a higher advantage is determined, and the occurrence of the predetermined effect is determined. The player will be very satisfied. In addition, if a predetermined effect occurs in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state is less than the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit or the second profit is confirmed, and the player is in the advantageous gaming state. You will be satisfied that some benefit has been granted by the end.

Feature D6. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
An opening / closing control means (a function of executing a special electric start processing, a special electric opening processing, and a special electric closing processing in the main MPU 82) that executes opening / closing control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state
With
The first profit is a profit that shifts to the first specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed, and the gaming state after the end of the first specific gaming state becomes the advantageous gaming state.
The second profit is a profit that shifts to the second specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed, and the gaming state after the end of the second specific gaming state becomes the advantageous gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5, wherein the first specific gaming state has a larger number of gaming balls that can enter the variable ball entry means than the second specific gaming state.

According to the feature D6, the advantageous gaming state will continue regardless of whether the first profit or the second profit is given in the advantageous gaming state, so that the player is satisfied regardless of which profit is given. However, since the number of game balls that can be entered into the variable ball entry means is larger in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state, the player is more satisfied if the first profit is given. It will be. In this case, if the predetermined effect is generated before the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state reaches the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit is confirmed, so that the game is played against the occurrence of the predetermined effect. Those will be very satisfied. In addition, if a predetermined effect occurs in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state is less than the predetermined reference number, the continuation of the advantageous gaming state is confirmed, and thus the occurrence of the predetermined effect is satisfied. Will be done.

Feature D7. A special information acquisition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3504 and S3509 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of the acquisition conditions, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and
The first profit is given to the player based on the result of the grant determination being the first correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the first information among the grant correspondence information, and the said Benefit granting means for granting the second benefit to the player based on the result of the grant determination being the second correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the second information in the grant correspondence information. (Function to execute the processes of steps S3703 to S3714 in the main MPU 82) and
In step S4006 and step S4014 in step S4006 and step S4014 of the main MPU 82, the content of the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means is pre-specified at a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. Function to execute processing) and
With
The first situation is a situation in which the special information to be granted determination includes the special information corresponding to the first information before the special information to be executed of the predetermined effect. Yes,
The second situation is a situation in which the special information that is the target of the grant determination does not include the special information corresponding to the first information before the special information that is the target of executing the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature D7, when the event that the first profit is given does not occur triggered by the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that is the target of execution of the predetermined effect, While the first profit or the second profit is given triggered by the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect, the grant judgment is made before the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect. When an event occurs in which the first profit is given as a trigger of the special information, the first profit is given as a trigger of the special information for which the predetermined effect is executed. As a result, when the predetermined effect occurs, the player is given the first profit triggered by the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that is the target of executing the predetermined effect. It will be possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if the event in which the first profit is given does not occur triggered by the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that is the target of execution of the predetermined effect, the first profit or the first profit or the first. Since 2 profits are given, even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the special information for which the predetermined effect is executed from being lowered.

Feature D8. Hold display control means (step S3504, step S3508, step in the main MPU 82) for executing the hold display corresponding to the number of the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means and not subject to the grant determination. (Function to execute the processes of S3510, step S3603 and step S3604) and
The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the predetermined effect is performed by setting the mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be executed of the predetermined effect as a special mode.

According to the feature D8, since the predetermined effect is executed by using the hold display, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the special information for which the predetermined effect is to be executed.

Feature D9. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and
A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
An opening / closing control means (a function of executing a special electric start processing, a special electric opening processing, and a special electric closing processing in the main MPU 82) that executes an opening / closing control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state is set.
With
The first profit is a profit that causes a transition to the first specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed.
The second profit is a profit that causes a transition to the second specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed.
The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, wherein the first specific gaming state has a larger number of gaming balls that can enter the variable ball entry means than the second specific gaming state.

According to feature D9, the first profit is more advantageous to the player than the second profit. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to be given the first profit triggered by the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that is the target of execution of the predetermined effect. Become.

Feature D10. The grant determination means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability that the result of the grant determination will be the first correspondence result is relatively high or low as the determination mode.
When the determination mode shifts from the low probability mode to the high probability mode, until the number of occurrences of the first specific gaming state reaches a specific number, at least until the result of the grant determination becomes the first correspondence result. Is in a continuous gaming state in which the high probability mode continues,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D9, wherein the first situation occurs in a state in which the remaining number of occurrences of the first specific gaming state in the continuous gaming state is one. ..

According to the feature D10, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player that the predetermined effect is generated in the state where the remaining number of occurrences of the first specific gaming state in the continuous gaming state is one.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the configurations of the features D1 to D10. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A special information acquisition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3504 and S3509 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of the acquisition conditions, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and
The privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (step S3703 in the main MPU 82) based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. -Function to execute the process of step S3714) and
Predetermined notification control means (main side) that executes predetermined notification when the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has already been acquired. (Function to execute control processing of hold notification in MPU82) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, when the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is already acquired in the situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired, the predetermined notification is executed, so that the predetermined notification is executed. In that case, the privilege may be granted more than once. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the predetermined notification is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. The predetermined notification control means executes the predetermined notification based on the acquisition of the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in a situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has not been acquired. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it includes means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4006 to S4011 in the main MPU 82).

According to the feature E2, even if the predetermined notification is executed, the privilege may not be granted triggered by the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification. .. As a result, the player expects that when the predetermined notification is executed, it corresponds to the granting of the privilege twice, and the player's attention to the situation in which the predetermined notification is executed can be increased. It will be possible.

Feature E3. When the predetermined notification is executed based on the newly acquired special information in a situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has not been acquired, the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification is While it is possible that the grant correspondence information is not supported, the predetermined notification is executed based on the newly acquired special information in a situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has already been acquired. If so, the gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification corresponds to the grant correspondence information.

According to the feature E3, although it is not certain that the privilege will be granted triggered by the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification simply by executing the predetermined notification, the predetermined notification is executed in the situation where the predetermined notification is executed. If a privilege is given triggered by the special information that is the target of the grant judgment before the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification, the privilege is also given to the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification. Will occur. As a result, when the predetermined notification is started, the player expects that the privilege will be given triggered by the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E4. Hold display control means (step S3504, step S3508, step in the main MPU 82) for executing the hold display corresponding to the number of the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means and not subject to the grant determination. (Function to execute the processes of S3510, step S3603 and step S3604) and
The game according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the predetermined notification is performed by setting the mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to which the predetermined notification is executed as a special mode. Machine.

According to the feature E4, since the predetermined notification is executed by using the hold display, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the special information for which the predetermined notification is executed.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the configurations of the features E1 to E4. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special game state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that a game ball enters the club to shift to a special game state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 32 ... Special electric winning device, 33 ... 1st operating port, 34 ... 2nd operating port, 82 ... Main side MPU, 83 ... Main side ROM, 84 ... Main side RAM, 93 ... Sound light side MPU, 103 ... Display side MPU.

Claims (1)

Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has already been acquired, the predetermined notification control means for executing the predetermined notification and the predetermined notification control means.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images